Page 1 2270/2870/ 3570/4570 SERVICE MANUAL SEPT. 2004 REV. 0 COPYRIGHT 2004 CANON INC. CANON imageRUNNER 2270/2870/3570/4570 REV. 0 PRINTED IN U.S.A.
Page 2 This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements or changes in products. When changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this manual, Canon will release technical information as the need arises. In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new edition of this manual.
Page 3 Introduction Symbols Used This documentation uses the following symbols to indicate special information: Symbol Description Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution, or Warning. Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks. Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire). Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.
Page 4 Introduction The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual: 1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with reference to the timing of operation. 　In the diagrams, represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name accompanies the symbol, the arrow indicates the direction of the electric signal.
Page 5: Table Of Contents
Contents Contents Chapter 1　Introduction 1.1 System Construction ....................1-1 1.1.1 Overview of the System with a Delivery Accessory .......... 1-1 1.1.2 Delivery Accessory System Configuration 1............1-1 1.1.3 Delivery Accessory System Configuration 2............1-4 1.1.4 Delivery Accessory System Configuration 3............1-7 1.1.5 Pickup/Original Handling Accessories System Configuration......
Page 6 Contents 2.2.10 Attaching Other Parts ..................2-24 2.2.11 If Not Connected to a Network ............... 2-26 2.3 Checking the Connection to the Network ..............2-27 2.3.1 Overview ......................2-27 2.3.2 Using the PING Function.................. 2-27 2.3.3 Making a Check Using a Remote Host Address..........2-28 2.4 Troubleshooting the Network ..................
Page 7 Contents 4.4.1 Overview......................4-12 4.4.2 Flow of Operation ..................... 4-12 4.5 Image Processing ..................... 4-13 4.5.1 Overview of the Image Flow ................4-13 4.5.2 Construction of the Image Processing Module ..........4-14 4.5.3 Reader Unit Input Image Processing ..............4-15 4.5.4 Compressio/ Extesion/ Editing Block ..............
Page 8 Contents 5.3.6 Image Processing ....................5-26 5.4 Parts Replacement Procedure .................. 5-29 5.4.1 Copyboard glass ....................5-29 5.4.2 Reader Controller PCB ..................5-31 5.4.3 Scanner Motor ....................5-37 5.4.4 Contact sensor ....................5-38 5.4.5 Copyboard Cover Open/Close Sensor ..............5-41 5.4.6 Contact Sensor HP Sensor ................5-41 5.4.7 Original Size Sensor ..................5-42 5.4.8 Reader Heater (option) ..................5-44 Chapter 6　Laser Exposure...
Page 9 Contents 7.3.4 Sequence of Operation (copying) ............... 7-8 7.3.5 Sequence of Operation (last rotation) ..............7-9 7.3.6 Sequence of Operation (last rotation) ..............7-9 7.4 Image Stabilization Control ..................7-10 7.4.1 Overview......................7-10 7.4.2 APVC Control....................7-11 7.4.3 ATVC Control....................7-12 7.5 Drum Unit ........................
Page 10 Contents 7.12.9 Toner Level Sensor ..................7-48 7.12.10 Toner Feedscrew Motor ................7-49 7.12.11 Static Charge Eliminator ................7-50 Chapter 8　Pickup/Feeding System 8.1 Construction ....................... 8-1 8.1.1 Specifications, Controls, and Functions.............. 8-1 8.1.2 Division into Blocks.................... 8-3 8.1.3 Division into Blocks.................... 8-4 8.1.4 Arrangement of Rollers..................8-5 8.1.5 Arrangement of Rollers..................
Page 11 Contents 8.5.4 Paper Retaining Mechanism ................8-43 8.6 Registration Unit...................... 8-45 8.6.1 Overview......................8-45 8.6.2 Checking Horizontal Registration..............8-46 8.7 Duplex Feeding Unit....................8-47 8.7.1 Overview......................8-47 8.7.2 Overview......................8-50 8.7.3 Sequence of Image Formation ................8-51 8.7.4 Sequence of Image Formation ................8-53 8.7.5 Flow of Paper (w/o/ delivery option)..............
Page 12 Contents Chapter 9　Fixing System 9.1 Construction ....................... 9-1 9.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions .......... 9-1 9.1.2 Major Components....................9-2 9.2 Basic Sequence ......................9-3 9.2.1 Power-On Sequence .................... 9-3 9.2.2 Down Sequence....................9-3 9.3 Various Control Mechanisms ..................9-4 9.3.1 Controlling the Speed of the Fixing Film ............9-4 9.3.2 Controlling the Fixing Film Temperature ............9-5 9.3.3 Cleaning ......................9-8...
Page 13 Contents 10.4.1 Power Supply ....................10-9 10.4.2 Rated Output of the DC Power Supply PCB ..........10-14 10.4.3 Protection Function ..................10-17 10.4.4 Backup Battery ....................10-16 10.4.5 Energy-Saving Function ................10-17 10.5 Parts Replacement Procedure ................10-20 10.5.1 Main Drive Assembly ................... 10-20 10.5.2 Power Supply Unit ..................
Page 14 Contents 12.2.3 Printer Unit...................... 12-2 12.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure ..............12-6 12.3.1 Scheduled Servicing for the Reader Unit............12-6 12.3.2 Scheduled Servicing for the Printer Unit ............12-6 12.3.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedures ............12-9 12.3.4 Points to Note About the Scheduled Servicing ..........12-11 12.4 Cleaning .......................
Page 15 Contents Chapter 14　Correcting Faulty Images 14.1 Making lnitial Checks.................... 14-1 14.1.1 Site Environment..................... 14-1 14.1.2 Checking the Paper ..................14-1 14.1.3 Checking the Placement of Paper ..............14-1 14.1.4 Checking the Durables ..................14-1 14.1.5 Checking the Periodically Serviced Items ............14-1 14.1.6 Checking the Units and Functional Systems...........
Page 16 Contents 15.6 Finisher/Saddle Finisher Error Codes ..............15-51 15.6.1 Error Code in Detail (finisher, puncher) ............15-51 15.7 DADF Error Codes ....................15-77 15.7.1 Error Code in Detail (DF) ................15-77 Chapter 16　Service Mode 16.1 Outline........................16-1 16.1.1 Construction of Service Mode ................ 16-1 16.1.2 Starting Service Mode and Making Selections ..........
Page 17 Contents 16.8.1 COPIER ...................... 16-116 Chapter 17　Service Tools 17.1 Special Tools......................17-1 17.2 Oils and Solvents ....................17-3...
Page 18: Chapter 1　Introduction
Chapter 1 　Introduction...
Page 19 Contents Contents Chapter 1　Introduction 1.1 System Construction ....................1-1 1.1.1 Overview of the System with a Delivery Accessory .......... 1-1 1.1.2 Delivery Accessory System Configuration 1............1-1 1.1.3 Delivery Accessory System Configuration 2............1-4 1.1.4 Delivery Accessory System Configuration 3............1-7 1.1.5 Pickup/Original Handling Accessories System Configuration......
Page 20: System Construction
Chapter 1 1.1 System Construction 1.1.1 Overview of the System with a Delivery Accessory 0006-6215 The system may include a delivery accessory that may enable any of the following three: - if a large volume of delivery processing or multiple types of delivery processing (e.g., stapling, punching) is needed: delivery accessory system configuration 1 - if delivery processing is limited to stapling/punching: delivery accessory system configuration 2...
Page 21 Chapter 1 　 iR 3570, iR 4570 [6a] [3a] [1a] [5a] [4a] [2a] F-1-1...
Page 22 Chapter 1 T-1-1 [1]Finisher-Q3 [1a]Installation Procedure - Installation of the Finisher-Q3 - Installation of the Buffer Path Unit [4] [2]Saddle Finisher-Q4 [2a]Installation Procedure - Installation of the Finisher-Q4 - Installation of the Buffer Path Unit [4] [3]Punch Unit-L1/M1/N1/P1 [3a]Installation Procedure - Installation of the Punch Unit-L1/M1/N1/P1 [4]Buffer Path Unit-E1 [4a]Instruction Sheet (indicating references)
Page 23: Delivery Accessory System Configuration 2
Chapter 1 　 T-1-3 Function provided Accessory needed - saddle binding Saddle Finisher-Q4 Accessories Power Supply-P2 Buffer Path Unit-E1 Expansion Delivery Kit-A1 T-1-4 Function provided Accessory needed - punching Finisher-Q3 or Saddle Finisher -Q4 Accessories Power Supply-P2 Buffer Path Unit-E1 Expansion Delivery Kit-A1 Punch Unit-L1/M1/N1/P1 1.1.3 Delivery Accessory System Configuration 2...
Page 24 Chapter 1 iR 3570, iR 4570 [4a] [3a] [6a] [2a] [5a] [1a] F-1-2 T-1-5 [1]Finisher-S1 [1a]Installation Procedure - Installation of the Finisher-S1 [2]Expansion Delivery Kit-A1 [2a]Installation Procedure - Installation of the Delivery Kit-A1 [3]Copy Tray-J1 [3a]Installation Procedure - Installation of the Copy Tray-J1...
Page 25 Chapter 1 　 [4]Accessories Power Supply-P2 (needed [4a]Installation Procedure when installing [1]; standard with 120/ - Installation of the Accessories Power 230V model) Supply-P2 [5]Inner Puncher Kit-Q1/R1/S1/T1 [5a]Installation Procedure - Installation of the Inner Puncher Kit-Q1/ R1/S1/T1 [6]Finisher Additional Tray-B1 [6a]Installation Procedure - Installation of the Finisher Additional Tray-B1...
Page 26: Delivery Accessory System Configuration 3
Chapter 1 T-1-8 Function provided Accessory needed - punching Finisher-S1 Accessories Power Supply-P2 Expansion Delivery Kit-A1 Inner Puncher Kit-Q1/R1/S1/T1 1.1.4 Delivery Accessory System Configuration 3 0006-6234 The following shows a typical system configuration of this type: Remarks: The Expansion Delivery Kit-A1 comes as standard with the following models:...
Page 27 Chapter 1 　 iR 3570, iR 4570 [3a] [2a] [1a] F-1-3 T-1-9 [1]Inner 2-Way Tray-D1 [1a]Installation Procedure - Installation of the Inner 2-Way Tray-D1 [2]Expansion Delivery Kit-A1 [2a]Installation Procedure (powered by the printer unit, not - Installation of the Expansion Delivery Kit-A1 requiring the Accessories Power Supply-P2) [3]Copy Tray-J1...
Page 28: Pickup/Original Handling Accessories System Configuration
Chapter 1 1.1.5 Pickup/Original Handling Accessories System Configuration 0006-6254 The following shows a typical system configuration: [10] [10a] [1a] [9a] [4a] [8a] [6a] F-1-4...
Page 29 Chapter 1 　 T-1-10 [1]DADF-N1 [1a]Installation Procedure - Installation of the DADF-N1 [2]Platen Cover Type-H [3]Original Holder-J1 [3a]Installation Procedure - Installation of the Original Holder-J1 [4]Side Paper Deck-Q1 [4a]Installation Procedure - Installation of the Side Paper Deck-Q1 [5]Card Reader-C1, Card Reader Mounting Kit-B1 [6]2-Cassette Pedestal-Y2 [6a]Installation Procedure...
Page 30: Printing/Transmitting Accessories System Configuration
Chapter 1 1.1.6 Printing/Transmitting Accessories System Configuration 0006-6265 The following is a diagram of the system configuration: [10] [11] [12] [13] F-1-5 [1] UFR II Printer Kit-E3 (P BootROM) [2] Printer Kit-E2 (H BootROM: for 230 V model) [3] Multi-PDL Printer Kit-E1 (N BootROM) [4] Expansion Bus-B1 [5] USB Application Interface Board-D1 [6] iR256MB Expansion RAM-B1 (standard with 120V model)
Page 31: List Of Print Transmission Optional Functions
Chapter 1 　 [10] Univrsal Send Kit -B1 (License) [11] Universal Send PDF Enhancement Kit-B1 (License: for 120 V model) [12] Universal Send PDF Encryption Kit-B1 (License: for 230 V model) [13] Universal Send Searchable PDF Kit-A1 (License: for 230 V model) 1.1.7 List of Print Transmission Optional Functions 0006-6266 - List of Print Transmission Optional Functions (120-V model)
Page 32 Chapter 1 T-1-12 UFR II print function ==> UFR II Printer Kit-E3 (P BootROM) UFR II/PCL print function ==> Printer Kit-E2 (H BootROM) iR256MB Expansion RAM-B1 UFR II/PCL/PS print ==> Multi-PDL Printer Kit-E1 (N BootROM) function iR256MB Expansion RAM-B1 Send function ==>...
Page 33 Chapter 1 　 Encryption PDF function + ==> Univrsal Send Kit -B1 Searchable PDF function Universal Send PDF Encryption Kit-B1 Universal Send Searchable PDF Kit-A1 iR256MB Expansion RAM-B1 1-14...
Page 34: Product Specifications
Chapter 1 1.2 Product Specifications 1.2.1 Names of Parts 1.2.1.1 Names of Parts 0007-2860 [18] [17] [16] [15] [10] [14] [11] [13] [12] F-1-6 [1] ADF reading glass retainer [2] DADF [3] Reader cover (front) [4] Control panel [5] Support cover (right) [6] Support cover [7] Delivery tray right cover [8] Delivery tray...
Page 35 Chapter 1 　 [13] Left cover (lower) [14] Left cover [15] Inside base cover [16] Left cover (rear) [17] Delivery tray rear cover (lower) [18] Delivery tray rear cover [19] [20] [21] [29] [22] [28] [23] [27] [26] [25] [24] F-1-7 [19] Reader over (right) [20] Copyboard glass...
Page 36 Chapter 1 1.2.1.2 Cross Section 0007-9223 iR2270 / iR2870 model [1] [2] [10] [11] [29] [12] [13] [28] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23] [24] [26] [25] [27] F-1-8 1-17...
Page 37 Chapter 1 　 iR3570 / iR4570 model [1] [2] [10] [11] [29] [12] [13] [28] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23] [24] [26] [25] [27] F-1-9 1-18...
Page 38: Using The Machine
Chapter 1 T-1-13 CIS unit [16] Manual feed pickup roller ADF reading glass [17] Pickup roller (cassette 1) Copyboard glass [18] Vertical path roller 1 Toner bottle [19] Feed roller (cassette 1) Drum unit [20] Separation roller (cassette 1) Drum cleaner assembly [21] Vertical path roller 2 Delivery roller...
Page 39 Chapter 1 　 ON/OFF Reset Guide 1 2 3 Additional Function Stop Start Display Contrast Clear Start/Memory Main Power Error F-1-10 [1]Control panel power switch [2]Main power lamp [3]Main power switch Do not turn off the main power while the progress bar is displayed, indicating that the HDD is being accessed.
Page 40 Chapter 1 F-1-11 1.2.2.2 When Turning Off the Main Power Switch 0007-3160 Be sure always to turn off the control panel power switch before turning off the main power switch When Using the Print Function/When Receiving or Transmitting a Fax Before using the main power switch, check to be sure that the Execute/Memory lamp on the control panel is off.
Page 41 Chapter 1 　 Start/Memory Error Main Power F-1-12 At Time of Downloading Do not turn off the main power switch while downloading is under way. Otherwise, the machine may not be able to operate normally. 1-22...
Page 42 Chapter 1 F-1-13 1-23...
Page 43 Chapter 1 　 1.2.2.3 Control Panel 0007-3163 ON/OFF 1 2 3 Additional Function Display Contrast Clear Main Power Start/Memory Error [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] F-1-14 T-1-14 [1] Reset key [9] Execute/Memory lamp [2] Keypad [10] Clear key [3] Control panel power switch [11] ID key [4] Counter Check key [12] Image contrast adjustment dial...
Page 44: User Mode Items
Chapter 1 1.2.3 User Mode Items 1.2.3.1 Common Settings 0007-3164 *Factory settings. **Indicated in the presence of a specific accessory. ***If iR4570, iR3570, iR2870, or iR2270, indicated in the presence of a specific accessory (if model F, standard). T-1-15 Mode Description initial setup select initial function: *copy/transmit/Box/MEAP...
Page 45 Chapter 1 　 Mode Description register paper type cassette 1/cassette 2/cassette 3/cassette 4/cassette 5 (paper deck); plain paper, recycled paper, colored paper, punched paper power consumption at sleep *low/high select special tray** (w/ finisher) - w/ No. 3 tray tray A: host middle tray tray B: No.
Page 46 Chapter 1 Mode Description - Finisher-S1 + option tray tray A: finisher option tray tray B: finisher output tray tray A: *copy/*Box/printer/receive/fax/other tray B: copy/Box/*printer/receive/*fax/*other fine setup for receive/fax tray A: receive/fax 1/fax 2 tray B: *receive/*fax 1/fax 2 - Finisher-S1 + No. 3 tray tray A: finisher output tray tray B: No.
Page 47 Chapter 1 　 Mode Description - w/ Fisher-Q3/Q4 tray A: finisher output tray (upper) tray B: finisher output tray (lower) tray C: host middle tray tray A: *copy/*Box/printer/receive/fax/other tray B: copy/Box/*printer/receive/fax/other tray C: copy/Box/printer/receive/*fax/*other fine tune for receive/fax tray A: fax/fax 1/fax 2 tray B: receive/fax 1/fax 2 tray C: *receive/*fax 1/*fax 2 - if w/o fax,...
Page 48 Chapter 1 Mode Description delete check copy: select source of paper: print start detail info: indicate detailed information, change form name register page/stamp characters register/edit: character string (up to 16) delete set manual feed envelope type ON/*OFF (if outside Japan, fixed to on) register manual feed paper ON (select paper size/select paper type)/*OFF standard mode...
Page 49 Chapter 1 　 1.2.3.2 Setting the Time 0007-3165 *Factory settings. T-1-16 Mode Description set time (fine) in 1-min increments (using +/-) set auto sleep time 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50 min; *1 hr; 90 min, 2, 3, 4 hr auto reset time 0: disable;...
Page 50 Chapter 1 1.2.3.4 Report Output 0007-3167 *Factory settings. ***If iR4570, iR3570, iR2870, or iR2270, indicated in the presence of a specific accessory (if model F, standard). T-1-18 Mode Description transmit (setup)*** transmission results report: *only if error/ON/OFF show transmission original: *ON/OFF show transmission original for coded PDF: ON/*OFF communication control report print automatically at 100 communications:...
Page 51 Chapter 1 　 Mode Description LIPS/emulation: status print, font list, LIPS utility (status print, overlay list, overlay print, font list, micro list, form list, color sample), N201 utility (status print, overlay print), ESCP utility (status print, overlay print), i5577 utility (status print, overlay print), HP-GL utility (status print, sample print) 1.2.3.5 System Control Settings 0007-3168...
Page 52 Chapter 1 Mode Description notify always if error: *ON/OFF user server route: ON/*OFF fax setup*** transmission start speed: *33600 bps, 14400 bps, 9600 bps, 7200 bps, 4800 bps, 2400 bps reception start speed: 33600 bps*, 14400 bps, 9600 bps, 7200 bps, 4800 bps, 2400 bps reception password: 20 characters max.
Page 53 Chapter 1 　 Mode Description register LDAP register, detail/edit, delete, print list server*** register license 24 characters set print ON/*OFF group ID: ON/*OFF date: ON/*OFF character: ON/*OFF MEAP setup use HTTP: *ON/OFF use SSL: ON/OFF print system info: print set device info register recipient: auto search/register, register, detail info, delete distribution auto distribution setup: everyday, day of week, *none...
Page 54 Chapter 1 1.2.3.6 Copy Settings 0007-3169 *Factory settings. **Items indicated in the presence of a specific accessory. T-1-20 Mode Description preference key 1 none, individual modes preference key 2 none, individual modes auto sort** *ON/OFF auto vertical/horizontal rotation *ON/OFF print photo mode ON/*OFF change standard mode register/reset (at time of shipment: 1 set, auto paper, auto density, auto...
Page 55 Chapter 1 　 Mode Description film photo mode***: OFF (ON/*OFF) number of retries***: *3 times (0 to 5 times) change standard mode for transmission function***: read mode: black-and-white machine default : *black 200 dpi/black 300 dpi/black 600 dpi/black 400 dpi (if fax only, black 200x100*/black 200x;...
Page 56 Chapter 1 Mode Description image reduction image reduction: (*ON/OFF) 　reduction mode: *auto mode/fixed mode rate of reduction in fixed mode: E210to: 75% to 97% (in 1% increments)/*90% direction of reduction: vertical and horizontal, *vertical only 2-on-1 record: (ON/*OFF) reception info record: add/*do not add set fax basic register user telephone No.***: settings...
Page 57 Chapter 1 　 Mode Description set fax reception ECM reception: (*ON/OFF) settings*** select reception mode fax/tel switchover: call start time: 0 to 30 sec (*8) call length: 15 to 300 sec (*17) operation after call: end/*receive audio response: ON/*OFF 　auto reception 　modem dial-in fax/tel switchover incoming ring: on (number of rings: 0 to N times)/*OFF remote reception: on (remote reception ID: 00 to 99, 25)/*OFF...
Page 58 Chapter 1 1.2.3.8 Box Settings 0007-3171 *Factory settings. *If iR4570, iR3570, iR2870, or iR2270, indicated in the presence of a specific accessory (if model F, standard). T-1-22 Mode Description set up/register user box select box: 0 to 99 register box name: 24 characters max. ID NO.: 0 to 99999999 file auto delete: 0: no, 1, 2, 3, 6, 12 hr;...
Page 59 Chapter 1 　 Mode Description pickup default paper size: *A4 (additional 12 possible) default paper type: plain (additional 8 possible) paper size replacement: replace/*do not replace adjust print super smooth: *use/do not use **toner density: 1 to 9 (*5) toner save: enable/*disable layout bind position: *long side/short side bind margin: -50to+50mm (*0.0)
Page 60 Chapter 1 Mode Description auto switchover** LIPS: *enable/disable ESC-P: *enable/disable 15577: *enable/disable HP-GL: *enable/disable connection recognition: *enable/disable printer settings rest: yes/no 1-41...
Page 61 Chapter 1 　 1.2.3.10 Address Book Settings 0007-3173 *Factory settings. *If iR4570, iR3570, iR2870, or iR2270, indicated in the presence of a specific accessory (if model F, standard). T-1-24 Mode Description fax (register target) register name: 24 characters register name: 24 superscript characters telephone No.: 120 characters max.
Page 62 Chapter 1 Mode Description i-fax (target register name: 24 characters registration) register name: 24 superscript characters select mode: *Simple/Full i-fax address: 128 characters server route: ON/*OFF fixed sentence 1: 40 characters fixed sentence 2: 16 characters fine settings 　paper size: A4/LTR+ B4,A3/11x17 　compression method: MH+ MR/MMR 　resolution: 200x100dpi,200x200dpi+200x400dpi/300x300dpi/400x400dpi/600x600dpi file (register...
Page 63: Maintenance By The User
Chapter 1 　 Mode Description register target simplified search (server) server to search: select from pull-down menu (LDAP server already registered) (register target) (search condition): name: 128 characters e-mail: 128 characters fax: 128 characters fine search server to search: select from pull-down menu (LDAP server already registered) search conditions): *name/email/fax/organization/organization-based *including next/not including next/identical to next/not identical to next/starts with next/ ends with next...
Page 64 Chapter 1 F-1-15 F-1-16 1-45...
Page 65 Chapter 1 　 1.2.4.2 Inspection 0007-4603 - Checking the Operation of the Leakage Breaker Advise the user to check the leakage breaker once or twice a month on a regular basis. Be sure also to ask the user to keep a record of checks. Inspection Procedure 1) Turn on the main power switch.
Page 66 Chapter 1 If the breaker switch has stopped between ON and OFF, be sure to shift it to OFF first and then back to ON. F-1-19 F-1-20 6) Turn on the main power switch. 1-47...
Page 67: Safety
Chapter 1 　 1.2.5 Safety 1.2.5.1 Safety of the Laser Light 0007-3174 Laser light can prove to be hazardous to the human body. The machine's laser unit is fully enclosed in a protective housing and external covers so that its light will not escape outside as long as the machine is used normally.
Page 68 Chapter 1 1.2.5.3 Handling the Laser Unit 0007-3176 If you must service the area around the machine's laser unit, be sure to take full care to avoid exposure to laser light: do not insert a tool (e.g., screwdriver or those with a high reflectance) into the laser path;...
Page 69: Product Specifications
Chapter 1 　 1.2.5.4 Safety of Toner 0007-3177 The machine's toner is a non-toxic material made of plastic, iron, and small amounts of dye. Do not throw toner into fire. It may cause explosion. Toner on Clothing or Skin 1. If your clothing or skin has come into contact with toner, wipe it off with tissue; then, wash it off with water.
Page 70 Chapter 1 Fixing method on-demand Delivery method face-down Reproduction ratio 25% to 400% Warm-up time iR 2270, iR2870: 30 sec or less; iR 3870, iR4570: 40 sec or less Image margin (leading 2.5 +/-1.5 mm (single-sided); 2.5 +/-2.0 mm (doubles-sided) edge) Image margin (trailing B4 or smaller: 2.5 +1.1, -1.7 mm;...
Page 71: Function List
Chapter 1 　 Maximum original size 297 x 431.8 mm Original size detection by reflection type sensor function Duplex method without tray Sleep mode Option See the system configuration chart. Operating environment 15 to 27.5 deg C (temperature range) Operating environment 25% to 75% (humidity range) Operating environment...
Page 72 Chapter 1 T-1-25 Single-sided Auto duplexing Paper size cassette feed manual feed cassette feed manual feed Plain paper 28[22] 25[22] 17/14 17/14 27[22] 25[22] 17/14 17/14 17/14 17/14 24/13 STMTR 17/14 17/14 28[22] 25[22] LTRR 17/14 17/14 free Heavy paper 23[22] STMTR 25[22]...
Page 73 Chapter 1 　 Single-sided Auto duplexing Paper size cassette feed manual feed cassette feed manual feed 25[22] 25[22] Envelope Monarch 10/6 COM10 10/6 ISO-B5 10/6 ISO-C5 10/6 10/6 YOGATA No.4 10/6 1.2.7.2 Printing Speed (iR3570/4570) 0007-7696 Max/Min (max when the machine has fully cooled) A value in brackets [ ] represents the iR3570.
Page 74 Chapter 1 T-1-26 Single-sided Auto duplexing Paper cassette feed manual feed cassette feed manual feed size 3 dlvry 3 dlvry 3 dlvry 3 dlvry dlvry dlvry dlvry dlvry Plain paper 45[35] 20/16 17/14 10/8 20/16 17/14 10/8 20/16 17/14 10/8 24/16 12/8 STMTR...
Page 75 Chapter 1 　 Single-sided Auto duplexing Paper cassette feed manual feed cassette feed manual feed size 3 dlvry 3 dlvry 3 dlvry 3 dlvry dlvry dlvry dlvry dlvry Heavy paper STMTR LTRR Post- card 18/10 free Envelope Monarch 12/8 COM10 12/8 ISO-B5 12/8...
Page 76 Chapter 1 1.2.7.3 Types of Paper 0007-7893 T-1-27 Source Type Size Manual Side Paper Cassette feed tray Deck-Q1 Plain paper, eco paper, A3, B4, A4R, LDR, LGL, recycled paper LTRR, B5, EXE, A5R, STMTR, A4, LTR Special Heavy A3, B4, A4R, LDR, LGL, paper paper LTRR, B5, EXE, A5R, STMTR,...
Page 77: Chapter 2　Installation
Chapter 2　 Installation...
Page 78 Contents Contents Chapter 2　Installation 2.1 Making Pre-Checks....................2-1 2.1.1 Selecting the Site of Installation ................ 2-1 2.1.2 Before Starting the Work (120V)................ 2-3 2.2 Unpacking and Installation ..................2-8 2.2.1 Unpacking and Removing the Packaging Materials ........... 2-8 2.2.2 Installing the Toner Bottle ................2-10 2.2.3 Installing the Drum Unit ...................
Page 79: Making Pre-Checks
Chapter 2 2.1 Making Pre-Checks 2.1.1 Selecting the Site of Installation 0007-4754 Select the site of installation against the following requirements; if possible, visit the user's before delivery of the machine: 1) There must be a power outlet properly grounded and rated as indicated (+, -10%) for exclusive use by the machine.
Page 80 Chapter 2 　 4) The room must be well ventilated. (The level of ozone generated by the machine in use will not affect the individuals around it. However, some may find its odor to be unpleasant, as when working in a poorly ventilated room.) 5) The floor of the machine must be level so that the feet of the machine will remain in contact and the machine will remain level.
Page 81: Before Starting The Work (120V)
Chapter 2 - With a DADF-N1, Side Paper Deck-Q1, Saddle Finisher-Q4, Buffer Path Unit-E1, and Puncher Unit-L1/M1/N1/P1 Installed 100 mm min. 1,983 mm 107 mm 2,091 mm F-2-4 7) The machine must be placed in a well ventilated area. It is important to make sure, however, that the machine is not near the air vent (for suction) of the room.
Page 82 Chapter 2 　 F-2-5 T-2-1 Drum unit Reversing Guide Lower right cover Cassette size label Adjusting screw Dial label covering rubber Shut-Down Warning Label Service book case [10] Toner Bottle Warning Label Check the documentation and CD against the following table:...
Page 83 Chapter 2 T-2-2 Operators manual: Reference Guide Operators manual:Copying Guide Operators manual:Mail Box Guide Operators manual CD-ROM:NW/RUI Guide MEAP Admin.CD-ROM Main unit warranty card Drum Warranty Registration card (English) Installation Check list...
Page 84 Chapter 2 　 1-3 Names of Parts [18] [17] [16] [15] [10] [14] [11] [13] [12] F-2-6 [1] ADF reading glass retainer [2] DADF (Option) [3] Reader cover (front) [4] Control panel [5] Support cover (right) [6] Support cover [7] Delivery tray right cover [8] Delivery tray [9] Inside right cover [10] Front cover unit...
Page 85 Chapter 2 [19] [20] [21] [29] [22] [28] [23] [27] [26] [25] [24] F-2-7 [19] Reader over (right) [20] Copyboard glass [21] Reader cover (rear) [22] Face over [23] Rear cover [24] Right cover (rear) [25] Manual feed pickup tray [26] Right cover (lower front) [27] Right door unit [28] Delivery cover...
Page 86: Unpacking And Installation
Chapter 2 　 be sure to lift it with 4 or more people. Unpacking Installation Memo: When placing the copier on the 2.2.1 Unpacking and cassette pedestal, be sure to align the two Removing positioning pins [1] to the holes on the base plate of the copier.
Page 87 Chapter 2 installation procedure for the 2-cassette To facilitate the work, try detaching it from Pedestal-Y2. the front top [2] of the fixing assembly release cover [1] in the direction of the 7) Remove the optical system fixing screw arrow. [1] at the outside of the right cover in the reader unit.
Page 88: Installing The Toner Bottle
Chapter 2 　 2.2.2 Installing the Toner Bottle 0007-4955 1) Open the front cover [1]. F-2-15 4) Mount the toner bottle [1] on the copier. F-2-13 2) Lift the lock lever [1]. F-2-16 5) Push down the lock lever [1] so that the toner bottle is secured.
Page 89: Installing The Drum Unit
Chapter 2 2) Remove the waste toner box [1]. F-2-17 F-2-19 Be sure to shift down the locking lever 3) Open the right door [1]. until it is fully horizontal; otherwise, no supply of toner will be made. 2.2.3 Installing the Drum Unit 0006-6766 1) Remove the two screws [1] and detach...
Page 90 Chapter 2 　 F-2-23 F-2-21 5) Turn the developing assembly pressure lever [1] to the left and release the pressure. F-2-24 7) Remove the package of the drum unit, which is provided with the product, and F-2-22 remove the two drum pressure release blocks [1].
Page 91 Chapter 2 Be careful where you hold the drum unit. F-2-25 - Do not touch the photosensitive drum surface. - Do not expose the photosensitive drum surface to light for a long period of time. - Do not touch the rowel of the drum. F-2-27 8) Mount the drum unit [1], which is provided with the product, to the copier.
Page 92 Chapter 2 　 F-2-28 F-2-30 10) Push down the developing assembly 12) Close the right door. pressure lever [1] and apply pressure. 13) Mount the waste toner box [1]. F-2-29 F-2-31 11) Secure the developing assembly 14) Mount the front cover unit [3] with the pressure lever with the one screw [1].
Page 93 Chapter 2 F-2-32 Reference Mounting the Front Cover 1) Fit the 2 claws [2] of the front cover unit F-2-34 [1] into the claw holes [3] of the machine. 3) While matching the 2 claws [2] of the front cover unit [1], slide the front cover unit [1] to the right.
Page 94: Securing The Copier Main Unit
Chapter 2 　 2.2.4 Securing the Copier Main Unit 0006-6767 - With a pedestal installed 1) Move the copier to the location where it will be installed, and then secure it with the 4 adjuster wheels of the pedestal. - Without a pedestal installed 1) Remove the cassettes 1 and 2 and tighten the adjusting screws [1] at the base plate temporarily until the screw...
Page 95: Connecting The Cable
Chapter 2 - When it wobbles in the direction shown by the arrow B, tighten the screw at the left side in the above picture. F-2-39 2) Connect the power plug to the power outlet. 1. Power supply voltage shall be +/-10% of the rating.
Page 96: Stirring Toner
Chapter 2 　 switch for 3 sec or more. 2. Go through the instructions for the shut- down sequence shown on the display so that the main power switch may be turned off. 3. Turn off the main power switch. 2.2.6 Stirring Toner 0007-5062 1) Enter the Service Mode.
Page 97: Apvc Correction Of The Drum
Chapter 2 cassette. 9) If a cassette pedestal is installed, make the cassette settings in reference to the installation procedure of the cassette pedestal. 2.2.8 APVC Correction of the Drum 0007-5071 1) Enter the Service Mode. (Press "*" first, and "2" and "8" at the same time, and then "*.") 2) Select COPIER >FUNCTION >...
Page 98: Adjusting The Image Position
Chapter 2 　 2.2.9 Adjusting the Image Position 0008-2475 - Adjusting the Margin (1st side; mechanical) 1) Using the cassettes 1 and 2 and the manual feeder as the source of paper, make copies, and check to be sure that the left margin L1 is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.
Page 99 Chapter 2 6) Remove the 2 claws [2], and detach the grip (right front) [1] in the direction of the arrow. F-2-47 image F-2-46 7) Loosen the fixing screw [2] of the F-2-48 adjusting plate [1]. 8) While referring to the index you checked in step 5), move the adjusting [1]Paper feed direction plate back and forth.
Page 100 Chapter 2 　 plate back and forth. Moving the make the following adjustments: adjusting plate toward the rear of the 2) Remove the paper from the manual feed machine will increase the left margin L1 tray. of the image. 3) Loosen the fixing screw [1] of the manual feed tray upper cover.
Page 101 Chapter 2 paper 2nd side horizontal registration [1]Paper feed direction setting. 5) Tighten the fixing screw of the manual small paper: service mode feed tray upper cover. COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ- 6) Put paper in the manual feed tray. 7) Make a copy, and check to make user An increase of '1' will increase the left that the left margin of the image on margin of the image by 0.1 mm.
Page 102: Attaching Other Parts
Chapter 2 　 margin of the image by 0.1 mm. - Leading edge margin Make a copy using the cassette 1, and check to be sure that the leading edge margin L1 is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm. If not, be sure to make the following adjustments 1) Make the following in service mode: COPIER...
Page 103 Chapter 2 F-2-59 2) Attach the Toner Bottle warning label [1] of the appropriate language behind F-2-57 [2] the front cover. - Shut-Down Warning Label 1) Attach the Shut-Down warning label [1] of the appropriate language to the right cover (rear) of the machine (i.e.,. on the left inside [2] of the main power supply.).
Page 104: If Not Connected To A Network
Chapter 2 　 cable as possible. - The harness must be wound around the ferrite core once before the core is fixed in place. - The harness is not trapped by the ferrite core. F-2-62 2.2.11 Connected to a Network 0007-6496 F-2-61 Reference...
Page 105: Checking The Connection To The Network
Chapter 2 2.3 Checking the Connection to the Network 2.3.1 Overview 0007-5605 The instructions that follow apply only when the machine is connected to a network. If the user's network environment is based on TCP/IP, use the PING function to make sure that the network settings are correct.
Page 106: Making A Check Using A Remote Host Address
Chapter 2 　 2.3.3 Making a Check Using a Remote Host Address 0007-5603 You can use a remote host address in combination with the PING function to check the connection to the network. The term "remote host address" refers to the IP address of a PC that is connected to the TCP/ IP network to which the machine is connected.
Page 107: Troubleshooting The Network
Chapter 2 2.4 Troubleshooting the Network 2.4.1 Overview 0007-5609 The instructions that follow apply only when the machine is connected to a network. If an attempt to connect to the network fails, the following may be suspected: a.the connection between the machine and the network is faulty. b.the machine's TCP/IP setting is faulty.
Page 108: Checking The Images/Operations
Chapter 2 　 2.5 Checking the Images/Operations 2.5.1 Checking the Image Quality and Operation 0007-5619 1) Place the Test Chart on the copyboard glass, and make copies using the individual cassettes as the source of paper; then, check the output images. - be sure that there is no abnormal sound.
Page 109: Installing The Card Reader
Chapter 2 2.6 Installing the Card Reader 2.6.1 Points to Note 0007-2705 The card reader must be used in combination with the Card Reader Mounting Kit-B1. 2.6.2 Checking the Contents 0007-2707 <Card Reader-C1> T-2-3 Card Reader-C1 1 pc. RS tightening screw (M4x10) 1 pc.
Page 110: Installation Procedure
Chapter 2 　 <Card Reader Mounting Kit-B1> T-2-4 Card reader base 1 pc. Relay harness 1 pc. TP screw (M4x25) 1 pc. TP screw (M4x8) 1 pc. Toothed washer 2 pc. F-2-66 2.6.3 Installation Procedure 0007-2709 When you have installed the Card Reader-C1, make the following selections, COPIER> FUNCTION>...
Page 111 Chapter 2 1. Hold down the control panel power switch for 3 sec or more. 2. Go through the shutdown sequence as instructed on the screen so that you may turn off the main power switch. 3. Turn off the main power switch. 4.
Page 112 Chapter 2 　 F-2-68 4) Remove the face plate [2] from the right cover (rear) [1] using nippers. F-2-69 5) Connect the relay cable [1] to the connector of the host machine. 2-34...
Page 113 Chapter 2 F-2-70 6) Mount the rear right cover using 4 screws. 7) Mount the card reader [1] and the card reader base [2] using the included TP screw (M4x8) [4]. Be sure to use the washer [3] when doing so. F-2-71 8) Route the relay cable [2] through the wire saddle [1].
Page 114 Chapter 2 　 F-2-72 9) Connect the cable [1] of the machine and the relay cable [2] of the card reader. F-2-73 10) While making sure that the harness will not be trapped, mount the card reader [1] using a TP screw (4x25) [3] fitted with a washer [2]. 2-36...
Page 115: Installation In A Netspot Accountant (Nsa) Environment
Chapter 2 F-2-74 11) Connect the power cable to the wall outlet, and turn on the main power switch. See that the machine is in a standby state, and start service mode. Make following selections machine's service mode (COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>CARD); then, enter the appropriate card number (1 to 2001).
Page 116 Chapter 2 　 Unless you have set 'system control group ID' and 'system control ID No.', you will not be able to execute 'register card to device' as part of NSA setup work. 3) In user mode, enter numbers of your choice for 'system control ID' and 'system control ID No.' as part of system administrator information.
Page 117: Installing The Ne Controller
Chapter 2 2.7 Installing the NE Controller 2.7.1 Installing the NE Controller-A1 0007-5625 When installing the NE Controller-A1 to its host machine, take note of the following: 1. be sure to perform the work in compliance with the laws and regulations of the country in question.
Page 118 Chapter 2 　 F-2-76 3) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the face plate [2] of the host machine's rear cover. F-2-77 4) Connect the cable [1] to the connector [2] of the host machine (intended for an NE controller).
Page 119 Chapter 2 F-2-78 5) Secure the controller [1] to the host machine's rear cover using 4 screws [2]. F-2-79 6) Take up the slack from the cable connecting the host machine and the controller; bundle the excess length on the controller side, and fix it in place using a harness guide [1]. 2-41...
Page 120 Chapter 2 　 F-2-80 7) Shift bit 4 of the DIP switch [1] (SW2-4) found on the PCB of the controller to ON (so that the communication mode between the host machine and the controller will be IPC). LED1 LED2 LED3 BAT1 LED5 LED6...
Page 121 Chapter 2 LED1 LED2 LED3 BAT1 LED5 LED6 LED4 F-2-82 If IC6 [1] is not found, you need not mount any. If you are mounting a ROM (IC6) [1] or replacing it for upgrading the connector, be sure to shift bit 7 of the DIP switch [2] (SW2-7) to ON. 9) Set the bits of the DIP switch [1] (SW3) on the PCB as indicated in the table.
Page 122 Chapter 2 　 T-2-5 Switch Setting SW3-1 SW3-2 function notation sets the modem signal transmission level to -16 dBm. sets the modem signal transmission level to -14 dBm. sets the modem signal transmission level SW3-1 see right OFF to -12 dBm. sets the modem signal transmission level SW3-2 to -10 dBm.
Page 123 Chapter 2 LED1 LED2 LED3 BAT1 LED5 LED6 LED4 F-2-84 11) Execute RAM initialization. Set the bits of the DIP switch [1] (SW-2) on the PC as indicated in the table; then, press the push switch [2]. A press on the push switch [2] (SW4) will causes LED5 [3] (red) to go on.
Page 124 Chapter 2 　 LED1 LED2 LED3 BAT1 LED5 LED6 LED4 F-2-85 12) After making sure that LED5 [3] (red) has gone on, set the bits of the DIP switch [1] (SW2) on the PCB as indicated in the table; then, press the push switch [2] (SW4). A press on the push switch [2] (SW4) will cause LED5 [3] (red) to go off, indicating that the RAM has been initialized.
Page 125 Chapter 2 LED1 LED2 LED3 BAT1 LED5 LED6 LED4 F-2-86 13) Shift bit 6 of the DIP switch [1] (SW2-6) on the PCB to OFF. LED1 LED2 LED3 BAT1 LED5 LED6 LED4 F-2-87 14) Connect the telephone line to the controller. If you are using the controller on its own, connect the modular jack cable to the connector [1] (LINE) of the controller.
Page 126 Chapter 2 　 controller. LED1 LED2 LED3 BAT1 LED5 LED6 LED4 F-2-88 15) Call the service station, and ask for initial settings for the controller. (When a call comes in, LED 4 [1] (red) will start to flash.) LED1 LED2 LED3 BAT1 LED5 LED6...
Page 127 Chapter 2 service station. Press the push switch [1] (SW4) on the PCB. A press on the push switch [1] (SW4) will cause LED6 [2] (red) to go on; when the transmission is done, LED6 [2] (red) will go off. If it has failed, LED6 [2] (red) will start to flash.
Page 128 Chapter 2 　 19) Press the Start key on the host machine, and see that LED3 [1] (pink) flashes each time paper is delivered. [25] LED1 LED2 LED3 BAT1 LED5 LED6 LED4 F-2-92 20) Attach the switch settings label [1] on the top cover of the controller, and record the settings of the switches.
Page 129: Chapter 3　Basic Operation
Chapter 3 　 Basic Operation...
Page 130 Contents Contents Chapter 3　Basic Operation 3.1 Construction....................... 3-1 3.1.1 Functional Construction ..................3-1 3.1.2 Major PCB Wiring diagram ................3-2 3.2 Basic Sequence ......................3-4 3.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operation at Power-On ............3-4...
Page 131: Construction
Chapter 3 3.1 Construction 3.1.1 Functional Construction 0008-0985 The machine may broadly be divided into the following functional blocks: general control system, original exposure system, reader control system, printer control system, laser exposure system, image formation system, pickup/feed system, fixing/delivery system. For detailed discussions of the individual blocks, see the chapters that follow.
Page 132: Major Pcb Wiring Diagram
Chapter 3 　 Laser Exposure System delivery/reversal/duplex assembly Image Formation System pickup control Fixing/Delivery System [10] cassette 1 Pickup/Feed System [11] cassette 2 3.1.2 Major PCB Wiring diagram 0008-0984 The following is a wiring diagram showing the relationship among major PCBs: J501 J502 J6801...
Page 133 Chapter 3 T-3-2 Reamer controller PCB Accessories power supply PCB Control panel CPU PCB [10] Printer power supply PCB Control panel inverter PCB [11] Controller power supply PCB Keypad PCB [12] BD PCB Main controller PCB [13] Laser drive PCB DC controller PCB [14] Cassette size relay PCB...
Page 134: Basic Sequence
Chapter 3 　 3.2 Basic Sequence 3.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operation at Power-On 0008-1235 1. Reader Unit Shading correction CIS output Main power offset correction switch ON SREADY STBY Reader motor (M501) CIS HP sensor (PS503) Shading Shading Shading CIS output position position position...
Page 135: Chapter 4　Main Controller
Chapter 4　 Main Controller...
Page 136 Contents Contents Chapter 4　Main Controller 4.1 Construction....................... 4-1 4.1.1 Construction and Mechanisms ................4-1 4.2 Construction of the Electrical Circuitry ..............4-3 4.2.1 Main Controller PCB ..................4-3 4.2.2 HDD ........................4-4 4.3 Start-Up Sequence ..................... 4-8 4.3.1 Overview ......................4-8 4.3.2 Start-Up Sequence....................
Page 137: Construction
Chapter 4 4.1 Construction 4.1.1 Construction and Mechanisms 0007-6459 The machine's main controller block consists of the following and has the following functions: T-4-1 Item Description Main controller PCB Controls system operation, memory, printer unit output, image processing, printer unit image input processing, rendering, color LCD controller, card printer unit interface, fax image processing, etc.
Page 138 Chapter 4 　 Reader unit DC controller PCB Main controller PCB Image memory (SDRAM) Riser board USB port Ethernet 10/100BASE-T SRAM Boot ROM Hard disk drive F-4-1...
Page 139: Construction Of The Electrical Circuitry
Chapter 4 4.2 Construction of the Electrical Circuitry 4.2.1 Main Controller PCB 0006-6592 The following is a diagram showing the major control mechanisms of the main controller according to connectors: J1014 J1004 J1016 J1028 J1003 J1029 IC1005 IC1010 J1018 J1017 J1024 IC1084 J1006...
Page 140 Chapter 4 　 T-4-2 Connector Description J1003 SDRAM connection slot J1004 SDRAM connection slot J1005 Fax connector (2-port) J1010 Boot ROM connector slot J1013 Riser board connection slot J1014 Scanner DDI J1017 USB port J1018 Control panel connector J1020 Power supply connector J1026 Hard disk connector J1029...
Page 141: Hdd
Chapter 4 Partition Description APL_GEN Mode memory data, standard mode data History (e.g., print job history) iFax image data Fax image data Other IMG_MNG Stores file management table, profile. PDL_DEV Stores PDL font, etc. BOOTDEV Stores execution module, message data file, RUI content, etc. FSTCDEV Chasing (not used) FSTDEV...
Page 142 Chapter 4 　 T-4-4 System software Description Location Remarks System System module (controls HDD (BOOTDEV) mechanism as a whole) Language Language module (controls HDD (BOOTDEV) LCD indications) Remote user interface HDD (BOOTDEV) module Boot Starts up the machine BootROM DIMM (FAX board) G3FAX...
Page 143 Chapter 4 RCON Printer unit DCON Main controller PCB DC controller PCB G3FAX *2 BOOT G3 Fax unit SYSTEM Language BOOTDEV BOOTDEV MEAP G3FAX *1 *1 1-line *2 2-line F-4-4...
Page 144: Start-Up Sequence
Chapter 4 　 4.3 Start-Up Sequence 4.3.1 Overview 0006-6702 The system software used to control the machine is stored on the HDD. When the machine is started, the CPU on the main controller PCB reads the system software from the HDD according to the instructions of the boot ROM boot program, and writes it to the image memory (SDRAM) of the controller PCB.
Page 145: Start-Up Sequence
Chapter 4 4.3.2 Start-Up Sequence 0006-6703 <Boot ROM Area> - Self Diagnosis Program (interval 1) 　The self-diagnosis program is run by the CPU on the main controller PCB when the main power switch is turned on. 　The program is used to check the condition of the image memory (SDRAM) and the HDD.
Page 146 Chapter 4 　 Progress bar F-4-6 - While the Self-Diagnosis Program Is Being Executed Image memory (SDRAM) System Image data area area Boot Self diagnosis program program BootROM Main controller PCB : access to the program during execution : access for checking F-4-7 4-10...
Page 147 Chapter 4 - While the Boot Program Is Being Run Image memory (SDRAM) System area Image data area System software Boot Self-diagnosis program program BootROM Main controller PCB : access to the program during execution. : flow of the system program. F-4-8 4-11...
Page 148: Shut-Down Sequence
Chapter 4 　 4.4 Shut-Down Sequence 4.4.1 Overview 0006-8356 If the main power switch is turned off while the machine is accessing its HDD, damage can well occur on the HDD. To avoid such damage, the machine is provided with a shut-down sequence.
Page 149: Image Processing
Chapter 4 4.5 Image Processing 4.5.1 Overview of the Image Flow 0006-6704 The following shows the flow of images in relation to the machine's functions: Other iR machine Original Copy Scan -SEND -FAX -PullScan -E-Mail -PDL Print Image data Print output -BOX F-4-10 4-13...
Page 150: Construction Of The Image Processing Module
Chapter 4 　 4.5.2 Construction of the Image Processing Module 0006-6706 The machine's major image processing is executed by the main controller PCB. The following shows the construction of the modules associated with image processing: Reader unit Reader unit controller PCB Reader unit input image processing block Processes the image data read by the reader unit.
Page 151: Reader Unit Input Image Processing
Chapter 4 4.5.3 Reader Unit Input Image Processing 0006-6712 The image data colleted by the contact image sensor is processed by the main controller PCB. Reader unit Main controller PCB Enlargement/reduction Edge emphasis -intensify-to-density conversion -density adjustment (F adjustment) -gamma correction Text mode Film photo mode Text/photo/film photo mode...
Page 152: Compressio/ Extesion/ Editing Block
Chapter 4 　 4.5.4 Compressio/ Extesion/ Editing Block 0006-6714 Here, image data is processed for compression, extension, and editing. Main controller PCB Printer unit image PDPDL image processing block processing block SDRAM Enlargement/ Compression reduction Expansion Rotation Integration to printer unit output image processing block F-4-13 4-16...
Page 153: Printer Unit Output Image Processing
Chapter 4 4.5.5 Printer unit Output Image Processing 0006-6715 The main controller processes the image data coming from the printer unit for output to the printer unit. Main controller PCB Compression/expansion/editing block Binary density conversion Enlargement/reduction Smoothing For PDL data, Thickening when fine line processing is ON...
Page 154: Flow Of Image Data
Chapter 4 　 4.6 Flow of Image Data 4.6.1 Flow of Image Data According to Copy Functions 0006-6746 The following is the flow of image data when the Copy Function is in use: Printer unit Main control PCB Image processing block for printer unit SDRAM Data rotation Data compression...
Page 155: Flow Of Image Data For The Box Function
Chapter 4 4.6.2 Flow of Image Data for the Box Function 0006-6747 The following is the flow of image data when the Box function is in use: Printer unit Main controller PCB Image processing block for printer unit SDRAM Data rotation Data compression F-4-16 4-19...
Page 156: Flow Of Image Data For The Send Function
Chapter 4 　 4.6.3 Flow of Image Data for the SEND Function 0006-6749 The following is the flow of image data when the SEND function is in use. Printer unit Main controller PCB Image processing block for printer unit SDRAM Data expansion Data rotation Resolution conversion...
Page 157: Flow Of Image Data For The Fax Transmission
Chapter 4 4.6.4 Flow of Image Data for the Fax Transmission 0006-6750 The following is the flow of image data when the fax transmission function is in use: Reader unit Main controller PCB Image processing block for reader unit SDRAM Compression Compression Expansion...
Page 158: Flow Of Image Data For The Fax Reception Function
Chapter 4 　 4.6.5 Flow of Image Data for the Fax Reception Function 0006-6751 The following is the flow of image data when the fax reception function is in use: Super G3 Fax Board Main controller PCB Image processing block for fax SDRAM Data rotation Data compression...
Page 159: Flow Of Image Data For The Pdl Function
Chapter 4 4.6.6 Flow of Image Data for the PDL Function 0006-6752 The following is the flow of image data when the PDL function is in use: Ethernet Main controller PCB Rendering processing block SDRAM Compression/expansion /editing block Processing block for printer unit DC controller PCB F-4-20 4-23...
Page 160: Parts Replacement Procedure
Chapter 4 　 4.7 Parts Replacement Procedure 4.7.1 Main Controller PCB 4.7.1.1 Removing the Rear Cover 0007-6401 1) Remove the 13 screws [1] and then the other screw [2]; then, detach the rear cover [3]. If the left cover (lower) has already been detached, the screw [3] should also have been removed.
Page 161 Chapter 4 4.7.1.2 Removing the 2) Remove the 9 screws [1], and detach the main controller PCB [2]. Main Controller PCB 0007-6407 1) Disconnect the connector [1]. F-4-24 F-4-22 Freeing the Flexible Cable Points to Note When Replacing the Main To free the flexible cable [1], shift up the Controller PCB lock first as shown.
Page 162: Sdram
Chapter 4 　 direction. F-4-25 4.7.2 SDRAM F-4-27 4.7.2.1 Removing the 4.7.2.2 Removing the Face Cover 0007-6411 SDRAM 0007-6412 1) Remove the 4 screws [1]. 1) Release the 2 locking levers [1], and 2) Loosen the 2 screws [2]. detach the SDRAM [2]. F-4-28 F-4-26 3) Pull off the face cover [1] in upward...
Page 163: Boot Rom
Chapter 4 4.7.3 Boot ROM 4.7.3.1 Removing the Face Cover 0007-6413 Refer to procedure 4.7.2.1 4.7.3.2 Removing the Boot ROM 0007-6414 1) Push the locking lever [1], and detach the boot ROM [2]. F-4-30 4.7.4.3 Removing the 0007-6410 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the HDD [2] in the direction of the arrow.
Page 164: Chapter 5　Original Exposure System
Chapter 5　 Original Exposure System...
Page 165 Contents Contents Chapter 5　Original Exposure System 5.1 Construction....................... 5-1 5.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions .......... 5-1 5.1.2 Major Components....................5-3 5.1.3 Construction of the Control System..............5-5 5.1.4 Reader Controller PCB ..................5-6 5.2 Basic Sequence ......................5-8 5.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operation at Power-On............5-8 5.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operation in Response to a Press on the Start Key (book mode;...
Page 166: Construction
Chapter 5 5.1 Construction 5.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions 0006-5712 The major specifications, control mechanisms, and functions of the machine's original exposure system are as follows: T-5-1 Description Item by LED array, indirect (LED + photoconducting body) Original exposure in book mode: scan by moving contact image sensor (CIS) Original scan in ADF mode: by original stream reading with contact image sensor...
Page 167 Chapter 5 　 Item Description in ADF mode: by changing original feed speed; by image processing on reader controller PCB; by image processing on main controller PCB*1 Lens rod lens array number of lines: 1 Number of pixels: Total 7488 (Number of effective pixels: 7180) maximum original read width: 304 mm CIS drive control by reader motor (M501)
Page 168: Major Components
Chapter 5 5.1.2 Major Components 0006-5714 The machine's original exposure system consists of the following major components: [12] [11] [10] F-5-1 T-5-2 Item Notation Description Original cover open/ PS501 photo interrupter: detects the state (open/ closed sensor (rear) closed) of the copyboard cover; starts original size indication when the original cover is at 25 deg.
Page 169 Chapter 5 　 Item Notation Description Reader motor M501 pulse motor: controls the drive of the carriage Reader heater* prevents condensation on the copyboard glass Original sensor 1 PS504 helps identify original size (AB, Inch/A, Inch/ Original sensor 2 PS505 helps identify original size (AB, A, Inch/AB) [10] Contact image sensor...
Page 170: Construction Of The Control System
Chapter 5 5.1.3 Construction of the Control System 0006-5715 The machine's control system is constructed as follows: [10] F-5-2 [1] Connection to ADF [2] Connection to printer body [3] Printer body (connected to main controller PCB) [4] Connection to ADF [5] Reader controller PCB [6] Reader motor drive control [7] Reader motor (M501)
Page 171: Reader Controller Pcb
Chapter 5 　 5.1.4 Reader Controller PCB 0006-5718 The machine's reader controller PCB has the following functional construction: DC24V DC13V J500 J501 J502 J504 J505 IC505 J503 J513 IC513 IC501 IC518 IC520 IC519 IC529 J506 IC530 IC522 J510 IC520 IC531 J507 J508 J512...
Page 172 Chapter 5 Jack No. Description J508 connects to original sensor 3, original sensor 4. J510 connects to the contact image sensor (CIS). J512 for use at factory J513 for use at factory...
Page 173: Basic Sequence
Chapter 5 　 5.2 Basic Sequence 5.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operation at Power-On 0006-5719 Shading correction CIS output Main power offset correction switch ON SREADY STBY Reader motor (M501) CIS HP sensor (PS503) Shading Shading CIS output Shading position position position offset correction - LED intensity adjustment...
Page 174: Basic Sequence Of Operation In Response To A Press On The Start Key (Book Mode; 1 Original)
Chapter 5 5.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operation in Response to a Press on the Start Key (book mode; 1 original) 0006-5720 Only if 1 sec or more has passed since previous rotation Shading correction start key STBY SCFW SCRW STBY Reader motor (M501) CIS HP sensor...
Page 175: Basic Sequence Of Operation In Response To A Press On The Start Key (Adf Mode; 1 Original )
Chapter 5 　 5.2.3 Basic Sequence of Operation in Response to a Press on the Start Key (ADF mode; 1 original ) 0006-5721 Only if 1 min or more passed since previous rotation Shading correction Start key STBY SREADY SCRW SCFW STBY Reader motor...
Page 176: Various Control
Chapter 5 5.3 Various Control 5.3.1 Controlling the Scanner Drive System 5.3.1.1 Outline 0006-5722 The machine's scanner system consists of the following components: Reader motor Reader controller PCB Carriage drive belt Copyboard cover open/closed sensor (PS501) Sensor light-blocking plate forward reverse Copyboard cover Cartridge...
Page 177 Chapter 5 　 5.3.1.2 Controlling the Reader Motor 0006-5723 The reader motor driver turns on/off the reader motor and controls the direction/speed of its rotation according to the signals from the CPU. Reader controller PCB 3.3V +24V OPT_MCK J505 MD_POW Motor M501 M_ENABLE...
Page 178: Contact Image Sensor (Cis)
Chapter 5 Original Start position trailing edge Original leading edge Stop Deceleration Acceleration Normal speed Shift speed Shift distance [1] used until the sensor reaches a speed suited to the selected mode. [2] used as a margin to ensure a stable speed. [3] used for reading the image at a specific speed.
Page 179 Chapter 5 　 Item Description CCD array collects the reflected light coming through the rod lens array. Image read line Light guide LED (R/G/B) Copyboard glass Rod lens array scanning direction C CD array LED (R/G/B) Light guide Rod lens array Light guide F-5-13 5-14...
Page 180 Chapter 5 5.3.2.2 Analog Control Inside the Contact Image Sensor 0006-5928 The contact image sensor (CIS) is used to control analog image processing in the following flow of work: The light reflected by the original is collected by the rod lens array; the light is then collected by the CCD array;...
Page 181: Enlargement/Reduction
Chapter 5 　 <Service Mode> for CIS unit gain correction data 　　COPIER>OPTION>BODY>CCD-LUT for CCD gain correction 　　COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>LUT-ADJ2 　　(using the D-10 Chart) 5.3.3 Enlargement/Reduction 5.3.3.1 Changing the Magnification in Main Scanning Direction 0006-5724 In Book Mode/ADF Mode The image is read at 100% in main scanning direction, and the magnification is varied by processing the data on the main controller PCB.
Page 182: Detecting The Size Of Originals
Chapter 5 Processing the data (digital; %) by the reader controller PCB Processing the data (digital; %) by the main controller PCB 2. In ADF Mode To suit the selected rate of magnification, the speed at which the original is read is varied and the data is processed by the reader controller PCB/main controller PCB.
Page 183 Chapter 5 　 reflection type sensors when the copyboard cover is closed/opened. The machine uses the following sensors; and the sensors are arranged as shown in the following figure: -for main scanning direction, reflection type photosensors (AB-configuration, 2 locations; Inch-configuration, 1 location). -for sub scanning direction, reflection type photosensors (AB-configuration, 2 locations;...
Page 184 Chapter 5 5.3.4.2 Outline of Size Identification 0006-6792 -In Bk Mode 1 original (A4R), copyboard cover (copyboard cover/ADF) is closed 1. Standby State 　 original sensor: off Original sensor 3 Original sensor 4 Copyboard over Reader unit Original sensor 1 Original sensor 2 Copyboard glas s F-5-16...
Page 185 Chapter 5 　 4. Copyboard cover is closed (with cover angle at 5 deg or more but less than 25 deg). 　 Original sensor: on (original size identification 2) Original sensor 3 Original sensor 4 Original (A4R) Original sensor 1 Original sensor 2 O riginal sensor 3/4 Original sensor 1/2...
Page 186: Dirt Sensor Control
Chapter 5 AB-Configuration Inch-Configuration O riginal Original Original Original Original Original Original Original Original size sensor 1 sensor 3 size sensor 2 sensor 4 sensor 1 sensor 3 sensor 5 11"X17" LTR-R No original No original :No original :change abse nt F-5-21 5.3.5 Dirt Sensor Control 5.3.5.1 Outline...
Page 187 Chapter 5 　 Start key Main power switch WMUPR STBY SCAN SCAN Dust detection control Dust detection control Dust detection control F-5-22 <Particulars of Control> -At the End of a Job (dust detection) The contact image sensor (CIS) checks the light reflected by the surface of the platen roller of the ADF at the read point for the presence/absence of dust.
Page 188 Chapter 5 F-5-23 -Between Sheets The machine does not move the contact image sensor (CIS) for dust detection between sheets. It reads the original using the position determined at the end or start of a job; if the presence of dust is detected, however, the machine will execute image correction. T-5-7 Point Discription...
Page 189 Chapter 5 　 Platen roller 0.5mm 0.5mm A B C reading Lens glass Contact image sensor F-5-24 <Service Mode> COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DFDST-L1 (level 1) (used to adjust the dust detection level between sheets) COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DFDST-L2 (level 1) (used to adjust the dust detection level at the end of a job) 5-24...
Page 190: Image Processing
Chapter 5 5.3.6 Image Processing 5.3.6.1 Outline 0006-5930 The following shows the major specifications and functions of the machine's image processing system: T-5-8 number of lines: 1 Number of pixels: Total 7488 (Number of effective pixels: 7180) size of pixel: 32 x 46.9 ym Shading correction shading correction: executed for each job shading adjustment: executed at power-on...
Page 191 Chapter 5 　 -CCD drive -CCD output gain correction, offset correction -CCD output A/D conversion 2) Digital Image Processing -shading correction Contact image sensor CIS) CCD(1 line) Reader controller PCB Analog image signal control signal drive control Gain EEP-ROM correction Target value data Analog image...
Page 192 Chapter 5 CCD8 CCD7 CCD6 CCD5 CCD2 CCD1 Light-receiving block output F-5-27 5.3.6.3 Gain Correction and Offset Correction of the CCD Output 0006-5932 The analog video signal generated by the CCD is corrected so that it will have a specific level (gain correction);...
Page 193 Chapter 5 　 for each job. 5.3.6.6 Shading Adjustment 0006-5937 In this adjustment, the machine measures the density of the standard while plate, and stores the results in memory as density data. It then performs computations on the shading data, and uses the result as the target value for shading correction.
Page 194: Parts Replacement Procedure
Chapter 5 5.4 Parts Replacement Procedure 5.4.1 Copyboard glass 5.4.1.1 Removing the Copyboard Glass 0006-9714 1) Open the copyboard cover (or ADF). 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the glass retainer [2]; then, detach the copyboard glass [3]. F-5-29 5-29...
Page 195 Chapter 5 　 When removing the copyboard glass, take care not to touch the following: - glass surface - standard white plate The presence of dirt can cause white/black lines in the images. If dirt is found, clean it with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
Page 196: Reader Controller Pcb
Chapter 5 5.4.2 Reader Controller PCB 5.4.1.2 Removing the ADF Reading Glass 0006-9730 5.4.2.1 Before Replacing 1) Open the copyboard glass (or ADF). the Reader Controller 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the 0007-0740 glass retainer [2]. 3) Remove the ADF reading glass [3]. If an ADF is used, be sure to execute P- PRINT of service mode to obtain its printout:...
Page 197 Chapter 5 　 5.4.2.4 Removing the flexible cable cover 0007-3566 1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the flexible cable cover [2]. 2) Disconnect the flexible cable [3] on the reader controller PCB. F-5-33 5.4.2.3 Removing the rear cover F-5-35 machine 0007-3565...
Page 198 Chapter 5 5.4.2.6 Removing the 3) Remove the 8 screws [2], and detach the cover [3]. Reader Controller 0007-0745 1) Remove the cover [1]. F-5-38 4) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and detach the 3 wire saddles [2]; then, remove the 2 screws [3]. F-5-36 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the flexible cable [2].
Page 199 Chapter 5 　 F-5-42 F-5-40 8) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and 6) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1]. free the cable from the wire saddle [2]. F-5-43 F-5-41 9) Remove the 2 screws [1], and pull out 7) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the the reader controller PCB base [2].
Page 200 Chapter 5 5.4.2.7 After Replacing the Reader Controller After Initializing the RAM 0007-0746 - Before replacing the reader controller PCB, be sure to generate the latest P- PRINT printout. <if you are initializing the RAM of the F-5-44 reader controller without replacing the PCB>...
Page 201 Chapter 5 　 a-2. main scanning direction position generated for the following: adjustment (fixed reading) 　a. main scanning direction position 　　　C O P I E R > A D J U S T > A D J - adjustment (stream reading) XY>ADJ-Y 　　C O P I E R >...
Page 202: Scanner Motor
Chapter 5 service book cassette to replace the old P- PRINT printout. F-5-47 F-5-46 2) Remove the spring [1], and detach the 5.4.3 Scanner Motor scanner motor [2]. 5.4.3.1 Removing the Reader Rear Cover 0007-3432 Refer to procedure 5.4.2.2 5.4.3.2 Removing the Scanner Motor 0006-9746...
Page 203 Chapter 5 　 5.4.4 Contact sensor 5.4.4.1 Removing the Reader Front Cover 0006-9758 1) Open the copyboard cover (or ADF). 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the copyboard glass retainer (right) [2]. F-5-50 4) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the reader front cover [2].
Page 204 Chapter 5 5.4.4.3 Removing the Copyboard Glass 0007-3421 Refer to procedure 5.4.1.1 5.4.4.4 Removing the Contact Image Sensor (CIS) 0006-9762 1) Pull the drive belt (front) [1] in the direction of the arrow so that the contact image sensor (CIS) [2] will move where it is shown in the figure.
Page 205 Chapter 5 　 Light guide COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>MTF-MG (main scanning direction MTR correction value) Rod lens array F-5-55 When mounting it, be sure to connect the flexible cable [1] before fitting the contact image sensor (CIS) [2] to the machine. MTF-MG F-5-57 Be sure also to update the value indicated on the service label found behind the left cover of the reader unit so that it is...
Page 206: Contact Sensor
Chapter 5 5.4.5 Copyboard Cover Open/ え Close Sensor 5.4.5.1 Removing the Reader Rear Cover 0007-3437 Refer to procedure 5.4.2.2 5.4.5.2 Removing the Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor F-5-59 (front/rear) 0007-0753 5.4.6 Contact Sensor 1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the screw [2];...
Page 207: Original Size Sensor
Chapter 5 　 After replacing the sensor, pull the drive belt (rear) [1] in the direction of the arrow so that the contact image sensor (CIS) [2] is returned to the farthest left. F-5-60 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the CIS home position sensor [3].
Page 208 Chapter 5 5.4.7.3 Removing the 3) Remove the 8 screws [2], and detach the cover [3]. Original Size Sensor 0006-9774 1) Remove the cover [1]. F-5-66 4) Free the hook [1], and detach the original sensor [2]. F-5-64 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the flexible cable [2].
Page 209: Reader Heater (Option)
Chapter 5 　 F-5-69 5.4.8.3 Removing the ADF Reading Glass F-5-68 0007-3427 Refer to procedure 5.4.1.2 5.4.8 Reader Heater (option) 5.4.8.4 Removing the Reader Heater (left) 5.4.8.1 Removing the 0007-0760 Copyboard Glass 0007-3423 1) Pull the drive belt (front) [1] in the direction of the arrow so that the contact Refer to procedure 5.4.1.1 image sensor (CIS) [2] is where it is...
Page 210 Chapter 5 arrow so that the contact image sensor is returned to the farthest left. F-5-70 2) Peel the protective sheet [1], and F-5-72 disconnect the connector [2]. 3) Free the cable from the wire saddle [3], and remove the screw [4]; then, detach the reader heater (left) [5].
Page 211: Chapter 6　Laser Exposure
Chapter 6　 Laser Exposure...
Page 212 Contents Contents Chapter 6　Laser Exposure 6.1 Construction....................... 6-1 6.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanism, and Functions..........6-1 6.1.2 Major Components....................6-2 6.1.3 Construction of the Control System ..............6-3 6.2 Basic Sequence ......................6-6 6.2.1 Basic Sequence ....................6-6 6.3 Various Controls ......................6-7 6.3.1 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing ............6-7 6.3.2 Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light ............6-10 6.3.3 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor ..............6-10...
Page 213: Construction
Chapter 6 6.1 Construction 6.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanism, and Functions 0006-9404 Laser Light T-6-1 Number of laser beams Output 5mW (iR2270/iR2870) 10mW (iR3570/iR4570) Wave length 785 nm - 800 nm (infrared light) Scanner Motor T-6-2 Type of motor DC brushless motor Number of revolutions 16000 rpm (approx.;...
Page 214: Major Components
Chapter 6 　 T-6-4 Synchronous control Main scanning direction Light intensity control Others Laser activation/deactivation Laser scanner motor control Laser shutter control 6.1.2 Major Components 0006-5970 F-6-1 T-6-5 Name Description [1] Laser unit Generates laser light [2] Polygon mirror Scans laser light in main scanning direction. [3] BD mirror Reflects laser light in the direction of the BD PCB.
Page 215: Construction Of The Control System
Chapter 6 6.1.3 Construction of the Control System 0006-5971 The laser exposure system is primarily controlled by the DC controller PCB. iR2270/iR2870 VDO1 /VDO1 CNT0 CNT1 CNT2 /VDO2 VDO2 PWCHG POLYGON FG +24V P ACC P DEC +3.3V F-6-2...
Page 216 Chapter 6 　 iR3570/iR4570 VDO1 /VDO1 CNT0 CNT1 CNT2 /VDO2 VDO2 PWCHG STAND BY FG PULSE DETECT POLYGON FG +24V P ACC P DEC +3.3V F-6-3 [1]DC controller PCB [2]Laser driver PCB [3]Scanner motor PCB [4]BD PCB T-6-6 Single Description VDO1 Image data single input CNT0...
Page 217 Chapter 6 Single Description CNT1 Laser driver control signal CNT2 Laser driver control signal VDO2 Image data signal input PWCHG Light intensify switchover signal FG PULSE DETECT FG PULSE detecting signal POLYGON FG FG output signal P ACC Motor acceleration signal P DEC Motor deceleration signal BD output level single...
Page 218: Basic Sequence
Chapter 6 　 6.2 Basic Sequence 6.2.1 Basic Sequence 0006-5972 When the control panel power switch is turned on, the laser scanner starts to rotate; when the motor rotation reaches its target revolution, the machine turns on the laser unit. Thereafter, when the Start key is turned on, the machine generates the image request signal (PVREQ) on the printer side, and turns on the laser beam with reference to the generated signal.
Page 219: Various Controls
Chapter 6 6.3 Various Controls 6.3.1 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing 6.3.1.1 Turning On and off the Laser Light 0006-5973 The laser light is turned on and off according to the combination of laser control signals (CNT0/1/2) from the DC controller PCB. T-6-7 Laser control signal Laser status...
Page 220 Chapter 6 　 DC-CON F-6-5 6.3.1.2 Main Scanning Synchronous Control 0006-5974 The synchronous control in the main scanning direction is performed in the synch circuit based on the BD synch signal. Using the BD signal generated based on the light from laser A, the DC controller PCB generates the BD synch signal for laser A and the BD synch signal for laser B.
Page 221 Chapter 6 J318 J316 BD_A RE_A MN-CON BD_B RE_B DC-CON F-6-6 [1] Sync circuit [2] Delay circuit [3] Line memory [4] VDO [5] VDO signal processing block [6] Laser driver PCB BD_A/B : BD synch signal RE_A/B : readout enable signal Memo: The BD sensor of the BD PCB receives light from laser A only, and is free of light from laser B, i.e., the BD signal is generated based on the light from laser A.
Page 222: Controlling The Intensity Of Laser Light
Chapter 6 　 6.3.2 Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light 6.3.2.1 APC Control 0006-5976 The laser light hitting the photodiode included in the laserdiode is monitored and is controlled so that it remains a specific level at all times. 6.3.3 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor 6.3.3.1 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor 0006-5978 The laser scanner motor is controlled with reference to the laser scanner motor revolution...
Page 223: Controlling The Laser Shutter
Chapter 6 6.3.4 Controlling the Laser Shutter 6.3.4.1 Controlling the Laser Shutter 0006-5979 When the right door is opened, the laser shutter link operating in conjunction with the cover causes the laser shutter to move down, thus blocking the path of the laser light. If the machine identifies the front cover or the right door as having been opened, it will turn off the laser scanner motor and the laser output.
Page 224: Parts Replacement Procedure
Chapter 6 　 6.4 Parts Replacement Procedure 6.4.1 Laser Scanner Unit 6.4.1.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit 0007-8348 1) Open the front cover [1]. F-6-9 2) Remove the face cover rubber [1]. 3) Remove the binding screw [2]. 4) Remove the RS tightening screw [3]. 5) Detach the front cover unit [4] by moving it in the direction of the arrow.
Page 225 Chapter 6 6.4.1.2 Removing the Left Cover 0007-8349 1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the left cover [2]. F-6-12 When have disconnected connector [1], be sure to take care so that it will not come into contact with the PCB that is mounted to the laser scanner unit.
Page 226 Chapter 6 　 mounted to the laser scanner unit. (The 3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the PCB is equipped with a laser scanner fixing [2]. intensity adjustment variable resistor, and contact with the PCB can change the adjustment setting.) F-6-14 4) Lift the front of the laser unit [1], and slide it to the front.
Page 227: Chapter 7　Image Formation
Chapter 7 　Image Formation...
Page 228 Contents Contents Chapter 7　Image Formation 7.1 Construction ....................... 7-1 7.1.1 Specifications of the Image Formation System ..........7-1 7.1.2 Major Components of the Image Formation System .......... 7-3 7.2 Image Formation Process................... 7-4 7.2.1 Image Formation Process (outline) ..............7-4 7.2.2 Image Formation Process (image formation)............
Page 229 7.10 Transfer Mechanism ....................7-26 7.10.1 Transfer Guide Bias ..................7-26 7.11 Photosensitive Drum Cleaning ................7-27 7.11.1 Outline......................7-27 7.11.2 Collection of Waste Toner ................7-27 7.11.3 Checking the Waste Toner Box ..............7-28 7.12 Parts Replacement Procedure ................7-30 7.12.1 Pre-Exposure Lamp ..................
Page 230: Construction
Chapter 7 7.1 Construction 7.1.1 Specifications of the Image Formation System 0006-6168 T-7-1 Drum Unit Specifications Photosensitive drum Drum type Drum diameter 30 mm Cleaning mechanism by cleaning blade Process speed 230 mm/sec (iR3570/iR4570) 137 mm/sec (iR2270/iR2870) Primary charging Charging method by roller (AC + DC) Charging roller diameter 16 mm...
Page 231 Chapter 7 　 Developing Unit Specifications Developing cylinder 20 mm diameter Development method by dry, single-component toner projection method (application of AC + DC) Toner single-component insulating magnetic toner Toner level detection by toner level sensor (inside sub hopper and developing assembly) T-7-4 Toner Cartridge Specifications Toner level detection...
Page 232: Major Components Of The Image Formation System
Chapter 7 7.1.2 Major Components of the Image Formation System 0006-5981 F-7-1 [1] Toner cartridge [2] Sub hopper [3] Developing unit [4] Photosensitive drum [5] Transfer roller [6] Primary charging roller [7] Drum unit [8] Drum cleaning unit...
Page 233: Image Formation Process
Chapter 7 　 7.2 Image Formation Process 7.2.1 Image Formation Process (outline) 0006-5983 F-7-2 T-7-6 Item Description [1]Pre-exposure removes residual charges from the drum. [2]Primary charging charges the surface of the photosensitive drum to a uniform negative potential. [3]Laser exposure forms a latent static image on the drum.
Page 234: Image Formation Process (Image Formation)
Chapter 7 7.2.2 Image Formation Process (image formation) 0006-6411 F-7-3 [1] The difference in potential between the drum surface and the developing sleeve causes toner to adhere to the latent static image on the drum, turning the image into a visible image.
Page 235: Basic Sequence
Chapter 7 　 7.3 Basic Sequence 7.3.1 Sequence of Operation (initial rotation) 0006-6865 ( iR2270 / iR2870 ) The sequence of operation of initial rotation is as follows: Pickup from the Cassette Registration Pickup motor Main motor (M-motor) Primary charging (PRI) Laser (LD)
Page 236 Chapter 7 7.3.2 Sequence of Operation (initial rotation) 0006-6867 ( iR3570 / iR4570 ) The following is the sequence of operation of initial rotation: Pickup from the Cassette Registration Pickup motor Main motor (M-motor) Primary charging (PRI) Laser (LD) Developing AC (DEV_AC) Developing DC (DEV_DC)
Page 237: Sequence Of Operation (Copying)
Chapter 7 　 7.3.3 Sequence of Operation (copying) 0006-6868 ( iR2270 / iR2870 ) The sequence of operation during copying is as follows: Registration Image write Registration Image formation sequence Sheet-to-sheet sequence Image formation sequence (1st sheet) (2nd sheet and later) Main motor (M-motor) Primary charging...
Page 238: Sequence Of Operation (Last Rotation)
Chapter 7 7.3.5 Sequence of Operation (last rotation) 0006-6870 ( iR2270 / iR2870 ) The sequence of operation of last rotation is as follows: Image write Main motor (M-motor) Primary charging (PRI) Laser (LD) Developing AC (DEV_AC) Developing DC (DEV_DC) Developing clutch (DEV_CL) Transfer...
Page 239: Image Stabilization Control
Chapter 7 　 7.4 Image Stabilization Control 7.4.1 Overview 0006-5986 At times, changes in the environment or wear on the machine can cause its image output to become unstable. To make sure that its output will remain stable at all times, the machine uses the following control mechanisms: T-7-7 [1] Drum film thickness detection control...
Page 240: Apvc Control
Chapter 7 7.4.2 APVC Control 0006-5987 The term APVC stands for "auto primary voltage control," and it is a mechanism used to control the primary charging application voltage (DC component) to suit the film thickness of the machine's photosensitive drum. APVC is performed every 500 sheets while the machine is in operation.
Page 241: Drum Unit
Chapter 7 　 7.5 Drum Unit 7.5.1 Charging Mechanism 7.5.1.1 Controlling the Primary Charging Bias 0006-5991 T-7-8 Primary Charging Bias AC bias 2700 Vp-p (max.) DC bias -450 V to -850 V These AC and DC biases are applied between sheets while an image is being formed (until the end of the ongoing job).
Page 242 Chapter 7 7.5.1.2 Primary Charging Roller Cleaning Mechanism 0006-5992 The machine uses a brush [3] to clean the primary charging roller [2], which remains in contact with the photosensitive drum [1]. The brush has a reciprocating mechanism and is driven by a cam [4], operating while the photosensitive drum is being driven. F-7-13 7-13...
Page 243: Drum Cleaner Unit
Chapter 7 　 7.6 Drum Cleaner Unit 7.6.1 Photosensitive Drum Cleaning 0007-5224 The cleaning blade is kept in contact with the surface of the photosensitive drum. It serves to scrape off the residual toner left behind from transfer to paper for collection in the waste toner box.
Page 244: Developing Unit
Chapter 7 7.7 Developing Unit 7.7.1 Controlling the Developing Bias 0006-6032 T-7-9 Developing Bias AC bias 800 Vp-p DC bias -450 V to -650 V Both these AC and DC biases are applied while an image is being formed, but are not applied between sheets.
Page 245: Toner Container
Chapter 7 　 7.8 Toner Container 7.8.1 Overview 0006-6323 The toner cartridge is constructed as shown in the following figure. The cartridge is filled with 1-component insulating magnetic toner (if iR3570/4570, 1220 g; if iR2270/2870, 1060 g). When the sub hopper requests a supply of toner, the cartridge itself rotates to feed toner. The machine's toner cartridge serves as a hopper (as it is found in past models).
Page 246 Chapter 7 iR2270/2870 F-7-15 Points to Note on Handing the Toner Cartridge 1. Care should be taken not to bump the toner stop [1] against the covers or the like when and after removing the toner cartridge. Since the toner stop comes off easily, toner scattering may be resulted if it comes off by accident.
Page 247: Route Of Toner Supply
Chapter 7 　 7.8.2 Route of Toner Supply 0006-6363 When the user fits the toner cartridge [1] in place, toner is temporarily stored in the sub hopper [2], inside which is a sensor that makes sure that the amount of toner remains at a specific level at all times.
Page 248: Controlling The Drive Of The Toner Cartridge
Chapter 7 7.8.3 Controlling the Drive of the Toner Cartridge 0006-5996 When a request is made for a supply of toner, the toner cartridge drive motor rotates in the direction shown in the following figure; its drive is transmitted from the drive motor to the toner cartridge, thus rotating the toner cartridge.
Page 249: Toner Supply Control
Chapter 7 　 7.8.4 Toner Supply Control 0006-5995 Supply of Toner from the Toner Bottle to the Sub Hopper If the "absence of toner inside the sub hopper" is detected while the main motor is rotating, the bottle motor is rotated intermittently (on for 3 sec, off for 2 sec), and the length of time during which the absence is detected is checked using a counter that increases its count for each on-off cycle.
Page 250: Recovery Sequence
Chapter 7 7.8.5 Recovery Sequence 0007-5234 The machine is not equipped with a mechanism to detect the replacement of its toner cartridge, but is designed to execute toner recovery sequence in response to the following, assuming that the cartridge has been replaced: 1.
Page 251: Toner Level Detection
Chapter 7 　 7.8.6 Toner Level Detection 0006-6350 Detecting the Level of Toner Inside the Sub Hopper The machine checks the level of the toner sensor located inside the sub hopper every 100 msec, and will assume the presence of toner inside the sub hopper if the sensor goes on twice or more continuously (200 msec or more).
Page 252: Transfer Unit
Chapter 7 7.9 Transfer Unit 7.9.1 Outline of the Transfer Unit 7.9.1.1 Outline 0006-5997 The transfer unit [1] consists of the transfer roller and the static eliminator. The transfer roller rotates in connection with the photosensitive drum. Bias is applied to the static eliminator so that sheets can be separated from the drum. F-7-18 7-23...
Page 253: Controlling The Transfer Bias
Chapter 7 　 7.9.2 Controlling the Transfer Bias 7.9.2.1 Transfer Roller Bias Control 0006-5998 The machine changes the output depending on the site environment (absolute moisture content), paper type, paper width, and source of paper. Environment: 5 settings according to absolute moisture content Paper type: plain paper, envelope, heavy paper, tracing paper, transparency, bond paper, label sheet Paper width: size boundaries as defined by 2 points...
Page 254: Cleaning
Chapter 7 7.9.3 Cleaning 7.9.3.1 Transfer Roller Cleaning Mechanism 0006-6318 The machine uses the transfer roller cleaning mechanism to return the toner sticking to the transfer roller back to the photosensitive drum by applying a cleaning bias to the roller. Once the toner reaches the drum, it is scraped by the photosensitive drum cleaning blade for collection in the waste toner box.
Page 255: Transfer Mechanism
Chapter 7 　 7.10 Transfer Mechanism 7.10.1 Transfer Guide Bias 7.10.1.1 Transfer Guide Bias Control 0007-5295 To prevent soiling of the transfer guide with toner or the photosensitive drum with toner images, the following transfer guide bias is applied to the transfer guide. The surface of the transfer guide is covered with an insulating sheet.
Page 256: Photosensitive Drum Cleaning
Chapter 7 7.11 Photosensitive Drum Cleaning 7.11.1 Outline 0006-6033 The photosensitive drum cleaning mechanism uses the photosensitive drum cleaning blade to scrape off the residual toner left behind from transfer; the toner thus collected is moved to the waste toner box. 7.11.2 Collection of Waste Toner 0006-6034 The waste toner scraped off by the cleaning blade is moved by the waste toner feedscrew to...
Page 257: Checking The Waste Toner Box
Chapter 7 　 7.11.3 Checking the Waste Toner Box 0006-6036 To prevent leakage of waste toner from the waste toner box or to prevent overloading the waste toner feedscrew, the machine is equipped with a waste toner detection mechanism. The waste toner box can hold about 2043 cc of toner, and the machine identifies the waste toner box as being full when there is about 1766 cc of toner or when the toner comes to weigh about 1050 g.
Page 258 Chapter 7 F-7-19 E190-0000 When the machine identifies the waste toner full sensor as being continuously on for 2000 sheets, it will indicate a warning; if it then detects the activation of the sensor for 100 sheets continuously, it will indicate 'E190-000'. (The count is increased coinciding with delivery.) 7-29...
Page 259: Parts Replacement Procedure
Chapter 7 　 7.12 Parts Replacement Procedure 7.12.1 Pre-Exposure Lamp 7.12.1.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit 0007-8024 1) Open the front cover [1]. F-7-21 7.12.1.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case 0007-8031 Refer to procedure 7.12.8 7.12.1.3 Removing the Toner Cartridge 0007-8342 Refer to procedure 7.12.3.3 F-7-20...
Page 260 Chapter 7 F-7-24 F-7-22 Reference: Lift the front of the upper tray [1], and detach it as if to slide it toward the front. F-7-23 7.12.1.7 Removing the Toner Cartridge Cover 0007-8346 1) Remove the 2 screws [1]; then, detach the toner bottle cover [2].
Page 261: Drum Unit
Chapter 7 　 7.12.1.8 Removing the Pre-Exposure Lamp 0007-8347 1) Open the 2 wire saddles [1], and disconnect the 2 relay connectors [2]. F-7-27 7.12.2 Drum Unit 7.12.2.1 Removing the F-7-25 Front Cover Unit 0007-8023 2) While freeing the lock [1] toward the Refer to procedure 7.12.1.1 right, detach the pre-exposure lamp [2].
Page 262 Chapter 7 2) Remove the screw [1]. F-7-31 F-7-29 5) Remove the drum unit [1]. 3) Shift the locking lever [1] to the left to release the developing assembly. F-7-32 F-7-30 Be sure to hold the drum unit as shown. 4) Remove the screw [1].
Page 263: Hopper Assembly
Chapter 7 　 F-7-34 2) Remove the toner cartridge [1]. F-7-33 7.12.3 Hopper Assembly F-7-35 7.12.3.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit 0007-8006 Refer to procedure 7.12.1.1 7.12.3.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case 0007-8017 Refer to procedure 7.12.8 7.12.3.3 Removing the Toner Cartridge 0007-8351 1) Shift up the lever [1].
Page 264 Chapter 7 7.12.3.4 Removing the Points to Note on Handing the Toner Drum Unit 0007-8352 Cartridge 1. Care should be taken not to bump the Refer to procedure 7.12.2 toner stop [1] against the covers or the like when and after removing the toner 7.12.3.5 Removing the cartridge.
Page 265 Chapter 7 　 When have disconnected connector [1], be sure to take care so that it will not come into contact with the PCB that is mounted to the laser scanner unit. (The PCB is equipped with a laser intensity adjustment variable resistor.
Page 266: Hopper Assembly
Chapter 7 4) Lift the front of the laser unit [1], and slide it to the front. F-7-41 2) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1] found at the front and the connector [2] found at the rear. F-7-40 When sliding out the laser scanner unit, be sure to take care not to touch the PCB mounted to the laser scanner unit.
Page 267: Sub Hopper
Chapter 7 　 F-7-45 F-7-43 7.12.4 Sub Hopper 4) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the hopper assembly [2]. 7.12.4.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit 0007-8020 Refer to procedure 7.12.1.1 7.12.4.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case 0007-8027 Refer to procedure 7.12.8 7.12.4.3 Removing the Toner Cartridge 0007-8386...
Page 268 Chapter 7 7.12.4.6 Removing the 7.12.4.13 Removing the Upper Tray Sub Hopper 0007-8389 0007-8396 Refer to procedure 7.12.1.6 1) Remove the 2 screws [2] from the back of the sub hopper [1]. 7.12.4.7 Removing the Toner Cartridge Cover 0007-8390 Refer to procedure 7.12.1.7 7.12.4.8 Removing the Pre-Exposure Lamp 0007-8391...
Page 269: Sub Hopper
Chapter 7 　 F-7-49 5) Remove the screw [1], and release the arm [2]. F-7-47 3) Remove the 3 screws [1]. F-7-50 6) Remove the bushing unit [2] from the sub hopper [1]. F-7-48 4) Free the cable from the edge saddle [1]. 7-40...
Page 270: Developing Assembly
Chapter 7 F-7-51 F-7-53 7) Disconnect the connector [1]. 7.12.5 Developing Assembly 7.12.5.1 Removing the Front Cover Unit 0007-8022 Refer to procedure 7.12.1.1 7.12.5.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case 0007-8029 F-7-52 Refer to procedure 7.12.8 8) Detach the sub hopper [1] from the 7.12.5.3 Removing the bottom.
Page 271 Chapter 7 　 F-7-54 2) Shift the locking lever [1] to the left to release the developing assembly. F-7-56 4) Remove the developing assembly [1]. F-7-55 3) Slide the developing assembly [1] slightly to the front; then, disconnect the connector [2]. F-7-57 Be sure to hold the developing assembly as 7-42...
Page 272: Developing Cylinder
Chapter 7 Be sure to hold the developing assembly as shown. F-7-59 7.12.6 Developing Cylinder 7.12.6.1 Removing the Developing Cylinder 0008-0013 1) Remove the 6 screws [1], and detach the top cover [2]. F-7-58 When fitting the developing assembly, be sure to fit the lower right segment [2] of the developing assembly [1] in the rail [3] of machine.
Page 273 Chapter 7 　 2) While freeing the claw [1], detach the sleeve front guide [2] in the direction of the arrow. F-7-63 5) Remove the screw [1], and detach the gear unit [2]. F-7-61 3) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the angle adjusting plate [2].
Page 274 Chapter 7 6) Remove the sleeve bushing [1], gear [2], and parallel pin [3]. F-7-66 8) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the blade unit [2]. F-7-65 When fitting the sleeve bushing, be sure to F-7-67 take note of the following: The protrusion [4] of the sleeve bushing must fit the recess in the gear unit side plate.
Page 275: Transfer Charging Roller
Chapter 7 　 11) Remove the developing cylinder [1]. 9) Remove the 2 screws [1]; then, remove the 2 bearings [2] and the sleeve holder (rear) [3]. F-7-70 When detaching/attaching the developing cylinder from/to the developing unit, be F-7-68 sure of the following: 1.
Page 276 Chapter 7 3) Remove the holder [1] from the front of 1) Open the right door [1]. the transfer roller. F-7-71 F-7-73 2) Pull off the pin [1] toward the front. 4) Remove the transfer roller [1] toward the front. F-7-72 F-7-74 7-47...
Page 277: Waste Toner Box
Chapter 7 　 7.12.8 Waste Toner Box Points to Note When Attaching the Transfer Roller 7.12.8.1 Removing the Be sure that the top of the holder [1] is on Front Cover Unit he inside of the static eliminator [2]. 0007-8008 Refer to procedure 7.12.1.1 7.12.8.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case...
Page 278: Toner Feedscrew Motor
Chapter 7 7.12.9.3 Removing the 7.12.9.11 Removing the Toner Cartridge Hopper Assembly 0007-8364 0007-8372 Refer to procedure 7.12.3.3 Refer to procedure 7.12.3 7.12.9.4 Removing the 7.12.9.12 Removing the Drum Unit Toner Level Sensor 0007-8365 0007-8373 Refer to procedure 7.12.2 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2];...
Page 279 Chapter 7 　 7.12.10.3 Removing the 7.12.10.11 Removing Toner Cartridge the Hopper Assembly 0007-8375 0007-8384 Refer to procedure 7.12.3.3 Refer to procedure 7.12.3 7.12.10.4 Removing the 7.12.10.12 Removing Drum Unit the Toner Feedscrew 0007-8376 Motor 0007-8385 Refer to procedure 7.12.2 1) Disconnect the connector [1].
Page 280: Static Charge Eliminator
Chapter 7 2) Remove the screw [1]. 3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the toner feedscrew motor [3] from the base. F-7-83 F-7-81 3) Detach the static eliminator [1] to the 7.12.11 Static Charge front. Eliminator 7.12.11.1 Removing the Static Eliminator 0007-8428 1) Open the right door [1].
Page 281: Chapter 8　Pickup/Feeding System
Chapter 8 　Pickup/ Feeding System...
Page 282 Contents Contents Chapter 8　Pickup/Feeding System 8.1 Construction....................... 8-1 8.1.1 Specifications, Controls, and Functions.............. 8-1 8.1.2 Division into Blocks.................... 8-3 8.1.3 Division into Blocks.................... 8-4 8.1.4 Arrangement of Rollers..................8-5 8.1.5 Arrangement of Rollers..................8-7 8.1.6 Diagram of Paper Paths (printer on its own)............8-9 8.1.7 Diagram of Paper Paths (w/ copy tray ) ............
Page 283 8.6 Registration Unit...................... 8-45 8.6.1 Overview......................8-45 8.6.2 Checking Horizontal Registration..............8-46 8.7 Duplex Feeding Unit....................8-47 8.7.1 Overview......................8-47 8.7.2 Overview......................8-50 8.7.3 Sequence of Image Formation ................8-51 8.7.4 Sequence of Image Formation ................8-53 8.7.5 Flow of Paper (w/o/ delivery option)..............8-55 8.7.6 Flow of Paper (w/ delivery option) ..............
Page 284: Construction
Chapter 8 8.1 Construction 8.1.1 Specifications, Controls, and Functions 0006-7400 The major specifications, controls, and functions of the pickup/feeding system are as follows: T-8-1 Item Description Paper compartment front loading Pickup method cassette separation retard manual feeder separation pad Paper reference center Paper volume cassette 1/2...
Page 285 Chapter 8 　 Item Description Speed of process iR2270/2870 137 mm/sec iR3570/4570 230mm /sec (nomal mode) 137mm /sec (low speed mode: manual feeding) Delivery accessory Expansion Delivery Kit-A1 (standard with iR3570/4570 model) Inner 2-Way Tray-D1 Copy Tray-J1 Finisher-S1 Buffer Path Unit-E1 Finisher-Q3 Saddle Finisher-Q4 Inner Puncher Kit-Q1/R1/S1/T1...
Page 286: Division Into Blocks
Chapter 8 8.1.2 Division into Blocks 0006-7401 [ 8] [ 7] [ 6] [ 5] [ 4] [ 3] [ 2] [ 1] F-8-1 [1] Pickup assembly (cassette 2) [2] Pickup assembly (cassette 1) [3] Manual feed pickup assembly [4] Registration roller assembly [5] Transfer assembly [6] Duplexing/feeding assembly [7] Fixing assembly...
Page 287 Chapter 8 　 8.1.3 Division into Blocks 0007-1444 ( iR3570 / iR4570 ) F-8-2 [1] Pickup assembly (cassette 2) [2] Pickup assembly (cassette 1) [3] Manual feed pickup assembly [4] Registration roller assembly [5] Transfer assembly [6] Duplexing/feeding assembly [7] Fixing assembly [8] No.1 delivery assembly [9] No.2/No.3 delivery assembly...
Page 288: Arrangement Of Rollers
Chapter 8 8.1.4 Arrangement of Rollers 0006-7402 ( iR2270 / iR2870 ) [25] [24] [23] [22] [21] [20] [19] [18] [17] [16] [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] F-8-3 [1] Pickup roller (cassette 1) [2] Feeding roller (cassette 1) [3] Separation roller (cassette 1) [4] Pickup roller (cassette 2) [5] Feeding roller (cassette 2) [6] Separation roller (cassette 2)
Page 289 Chapter 8 　 [7] Vertical path roller 2 [8] Vertical path slave roller 2 [9] Vertical path roller 1 [10] Vertical path slave roller 1 [11] Manual feed pickup roller [12] Registration roller (inside) [13] Registration roller (outside) [14] Duplexing/feed roller 2 [15] Duplexing/feeding member 2 [16] Transfer roller [17] Drum...
Page 290 Chapter 8 8.1.5 Arrangement of Rollers 0007-1461 ( iR3570 / iR4570 ) [33] [32] [31] [30] [29] [28] [27] [26] [25] [24] [34] [23] [35] [22] [21] [20] [19] [18] [17] [16] [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] [7] [8] F-8-4 [1] Pickup roller (cassette 1) [2] Feed roller (cassette 1)
Page 291 Chapter 8 　 [4] Pickup roller (cassette 2) [5] Feed roller (cassette 2) [6] Separation roller (cassette 2) [7] Vertical path roller 2 [8] Vertical path slave roller 2 [9] Vertical path roller 1 [10] Vertical path slave roller 1 [11] Manual feed pickup roller [12] Registration roller (inside) [13] Registration roller (outside)
Page 292: Diagram Of Paper Paths (Printer On Its Own)
Chapter 8 8.1.6 Diagram of Paper Paths (printer on its own) 0006-7403 ( iR2270 / iR2870 ) F-8-5 [1] Pickup from cassette 1 [2] Pickup from cassette 2 [3] Pickup from cassette pedestal [4] Pickup from side paper deck [5] Pickup from manual feeder [6] Delivery from copy tray 1...
Page 293: Diagram Of Paper Paths (W/ Copy Tray )
Chapter 8 　 8.1.7 Diagram of Paper Paths (w/ copy tray ) 0007-1484 ( iR3570 / iR4570 ) F-8-6 [1] Pickup from cassette 1 [2] Pickup from cassette 2 [3] Pickup from cassette pedestal (option) [4] Pickup from side paper deck (option) [5] Pickup from manual feeder [6] Delivery to copy tray 1 [7] Delivery to copy tray 2 (option)
Page 294: Diagram Of Paper Paths (W/ Expansion Delivery Kit/Copy Tray)
Chapter 8 8.1.8 Diagram of Paper Paths (w/ expansion delivery kit/ copy tray) 0006-7404 ( iR2270 / iR2870 ) F-8-7 [1] Pickup from cassette 1 [2] Pickup from cassette 2 [3] Pickup from cassette pedestal (option) [4] Pickup from side paper deck (option) [5] Pickup from manual feeder [6] Delivery to copy tray 1 [7] Delivery to copy tray 2 (option)
Page 295: Diagram Of Paper Paths (W/ Finisher-S1/Copy Tray)
Chapter 8 　 8.1.9 Diagram of Paper Paths (w/ Finisher-S1/copy tray) 0006-7405 F-8-8 [1] Pickup from cassette 1 [2] Pickup from cassette 2 [3] Pickup from cassette pedestal (option) [4] Pickup from paper deck (option) [5] Pickup from manual feeder [6] Delivery to Finisher-S1 (option) [7] Delivery to copy tray 3 (option) 8-12...
Page 296: Diagram Of Paper Paths (W/ Finisher-Q3/Saddle Finisher-Q4)
Chapter 8 8.1.10 Diagram of Paper Paths (w/ Finisher-Q3/Saddle Finisher-Q4) 0006-7406 F-8-9 [1] Pickup from cassette 1 [2] Pickup from cassette 2 [3] Pickup from cassette pedestal (option) [4] Pickup from paper deck (option) [5] Pickup from manual feeder [6] Delivery to Finisher-Q3/Saddle Finisher-Q4 (option) [7] No.2 delivery assembly (option) 8-13...
Page 297: Arrangement Of Sensors
Chapter 8 　 8.1.11 Arrangement of Sensors 0006-7408 ( iR2270 / iR2870 ) [13] [14] [12] [11] [10] F-8-10 [1] Cassette 1 paper level sensor B (PS4) [2] Cassette 1 paper level sensor A (PS3) [3] Cassette 2 paper level sensor B (PS6) [4] Cassette 2 paper level sensor A (PS5) [5] Cassette 2 paper sensor (PS2) [6] Cassette 2 retry sensor (PS11)
Page 298 Chapter 8 [10] Registration sensor (PS9) [11] Duplexing/feed sensor (PS17) [12] Fixing/delivery paper sensor (PS13) [14] Delivery sensor 1 (PS14) [15] Delivery paper full sensor 1 (PS15) 8.1.12 Arrangement of Sensors 0007-1487 ( iR3570 / iR4570 ) [19] [18] [17] [16] [15] [13]...
Page 299 Chapter 8 　 [1] Cassette 1 paper level sensor B (PS4) [2] Cassette 1 paper level sensor A (PS3) [3] Cassette 2 paper level sensor B (PS6) [4] Cassette 2 paper level sensor A (PS5) [5] Cassette 2 paper sensor (PS2) [6] Cassette 2 retry sensor (PS11) [7] Cassette 1 paper sensor (PS1) [8] Cassette 1 retry sensor (PS10)
Page 300: Route Of Drive
Chapter 8 8.1.13 Route of Drive 0006-7411 ( iR2270 / iR2870 ) F-8-12 M2 Main motor M3 Fixing motor M4 No.1 delivery motor M6 Cassette 1 pickup motor M7 Cassette 2 pickup motor SL1 Cassette 1 pickup solenoid SL2 Cassette 2 pickup solenoid CL1 Manual pickup clutch CL2 Registration clutch CL6 Duplexing clutch...
Page 301 Chapter 8 　 8.1.14 Route of Drive 0007-9020( ( iR3570 / iR4570 ) - Main Body F-8-13 M2 Main motor M3 Fixing motor M4 No.1 delivery motor M6 Cassette 1 pickup motor M7 Cassette 2 pickup motor M10 Duplexing motor SL1 Cassette 1 pickup solenoid SL2 Cassette 2 pickup solenoid CL1 Manual pickup clutch...
Page 302 Chapter 8 - Expancion Delivery Unit F-8-14 M1 No.2 delivery motor M2 No.3 delivery motor SL1 No.1 delivery solenoid SL2 No.2 delivery solenoid SL3 No.3 delivery solenoid 8-19...
Page 303: Basic Sequence
Chapter 8 　 8.2 Basic Sequence 8.2.1 Basic Sequence 0007-2658 - Basic Sequence of Operation for Making 3 Prints Print Start PRINT Cassette 1 pickup motor (M6) Cassette 1 pickup solenoid (SL1) Cassette 1 retry sensor (PS10) Main motor (M2) Registration sensor (PS9) Registration clutch...
Page 304: Increase In Speed
Chapter 8 8.2.2 Increase in Speed 0007-2660 The machine increases the speed of moving paper over specific intervals. An overview and the associated accessories for the increase in speed are as follows: - No Delivery Accessory F-8-16 1. Increase in Speed for Pickup Operation The speed is 1.5 times as high as the process speed (no increase if for manual feed pickup/ in the case of the 1st sheet from cassette 1, accelerates to about twice as fast).
Page 305 Chapter 8 　 - Finisher-S1 in Use F-8-17 1. Increase in Speed for Pickup Operation The speed is 1.5 times as high as the process speed (no increase if for manual feed pickup/ in the case of the 1st sheet from cassette 1, accelerates to about twice as fast). 2.
Page 306 Chapter 8 - Finisher-Q3/Q4 in Use [4 ] [1 ] F-8-18 1. Increase in Speed for Pickup Operation The speed is 1.5 times as high as the process speed (no increase if for manual feed pickup/ in the case of the 1st sheet from cassette 1, accelerates to about twice as fast). 2.
Page 307: Increase In Speed
Chapter 8 　 8.2.3 Increase in Speed 0007-8663 ( iR3570 / iR4570 ) The machine increases the speed of moving paper over specific intervals. An overview and the associated accessories for the increase in speed are as follows: - Finisher-S1 in Use F-8-19 1.
Page 308 Chapter 8 - Finisher-Q3/Q4 in Use F-8-20 1. Increase in Speed for Pickup The speed is 1.5 times as high as the process speed (in the cassette of manual feed, decelerates to about 0.6). 2. Increase in Speed for Reversal The speed is 2 times as high as the process speed.
Page 309: Detecting Jams
Chapter 8 　 8.3 Detecting Jams 8.3.1 Delivery Jams 8.3.1.1 Delay Jam Outside the Cassette Pickup Assembly 0007-2663 A delay jam outside the cassette pickup assembly is identified as follows: The length of time it takes for paper to move from the sensor N-1 to the delay jam sensor N is kept under control;...
Page 310: Stationary Jams
Chapter 8 8.3.1.2 Delay Jam in the Cassette Pickup Assembly 0007-2664 The leading edge of paper does not reach the sensor after the cassette 1/2 pickup motor has started to rotate. Start key ON or PRINT set INTR PRINT Pickup motor Jam check Normal Error...
Page 311 Chapter 8 　 8.3.2.1 Common Stationary Jam 0007-2665 The sensor N does not go off within a specific length of time after the sensor has gone on. Start key ON or PRINT set INTR PRINT L + A L + A Jam Check Normal Error...
Page 312: Other Jams
Chapter 8 8.3.2.2 Stationary Jam at Power-On 0007-2666 The machine makes a check to see that there is no paper over the following sensors before it starts initial multiple rotation at power-on: T-8-5 Sensor Cassette 1 retry sensor (PS10) Cassette 2 retry sensor (PS11) Registration sensor (PS9) Fixing outlet sensor (PS13) No.
Page 313: Cassette Pick-Up Unit
Chapter 8 　 8.4 Cassette Pick-Up Unit 8.4.1 Overview 0007-2121 The paper inside the cassette is held up by the lifter plate. When pickup takes place, the pickup roller moves down to come into contact with the surface of paper. The pickup roller is moved down when the pickup solenoid goes on.
Page 314: Basic Sequence
Chapter 8 8.4.2 Basic Sequence 0007-7947 - Basic Sequence of Operation for Making 3 Prints Print Start PRINT Cassette 1 pickup motor (M6) Cassette 1 pickup solenoid (SL1) Cassette 1 retry sensor (PS10) Main motor (M2) Registration sensor (PS9) Registration clutch (CL2) Fixing motor (M11)
Page 315 Chapter 8 　 INCH SW4-ON=INCH F-8-26 [1] AB/Inch switch [2] Cassette size dial [3] Cassette size detection PCB T-8-7 AB-configuration Size (no cassette) 8-32...
Page 316 Chapter 8 AB-configuration Envelope ON/OFF SW4 is used to detect the state of the AB/Inch-configuration switch. The machine will assume the absence of a cassette if it detects a combination not found in the table. At this time, it does not move up the cassette lifter. Since the paper size is not identified, there will be no indication of a paper size on the control panel;...
Page 317: Setting Up The Universal Cassette
Chapter 8 　 Inch-configuration Envelope ON/OFF SW4 is used to detect the state of the AB/Inch-configuration switch. The machine will assume the absence of a cassette if it detects a combination not found in the table. At this time, it does not move up the cassette lifter. Since the paper size is not identified, there will be no indication of a paper size on the control panel;...
Page 318 Chapter 8 Universal U1 Through U4 Size B-OFI A-OFI M-OFI FOLI A-FLS G-LTR G-LGL A-LTR (LTR) A-LTRR (LTRR) 8-35...
Page 319: Paper Level Sensor
Chapter 8 　 8.4.5 Paper Level Sensor 0007-8702 The level of paper inside the cassette is checked using the following sensors: T-8-11 Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Paper level sensor A Paper level sensor B Paper sensor 8-36...
Page 320 Chapter 8 F-8-27 [1] Flag [2] Cassette paper sensor [3] Lifter clutch [4] Cassette paper level sensor A [5] Cassette paper level sensor B [6] Paper level sensor flag [7] Lifter gear [8] Tray 8-37...
Page 321 Chapter 8 　 View from the Front of the Machine When full with paper Cassette paper Cassette paper level sensor B level sensor A Paper When half full with paper Paper Cassette paper Cassette paper level sensor A level sensor B OFF ON When there is little paper Paper...
Page 322 Chapter 8 T-8-12 Paper level Paper level Control panel Paper sensor Paper level sensor A sensor B indication 100% to 50% of capacity 50% to 50 sheets (approx.) 50 sheets or less (approx.) No paper 8-39...
Page 323: Manual Feed Pickup Unit
Chapter 8 　 8.5 Manual Feed Pickup Unit 8.5.1 Overview 0007-2123 The paper in the tray of the manual feed pickup unit is forced against the manual feed pickup roller by the work of the pickup guide plate; the manual feed pickup roller and the separation pad serve to make sure that only a single sheet of paper is separated and moved into the machine: (1) the pickup guide plate is locked in place at all times, and does not require drive for...
Page 324: Basic Sequence Of Operation
Chapter 8 [7] Manual feed paper sensor flag [8] Separation pad [9] Manual feed pickup roller [10] (to registration roller assembly) The machine's manual feed pickup unit is not equipped with a sensor that may detect the last sheet of paper. 8.5.2 Basic Sequence of Operation 0007-2124 The multi-pickup roller starts to rotate when the manual pickup clutch (CL1) goes on to start...
Page 325: Identifying The Paper Size
Chapter 8 　 8.5.3 Identifying the Paper Size 0007-2187 The width of paper is detected with reference to the output of the variable resistor (SVR1), which operates in conjunction with the movement of the side guide. The side guide in the manual feed tray is set when the user moves it to place paper in the cassette.
Page 326: Paper Retaining Mechanism
Chapter 8 8.5.4 Paper Retaining Mechanism 0007-2189 The holding plate of the machine's cassette is fixed in position at all times, and does not move up/down at time of pickup, and must temporarily be released when paper is set between it and the manual feed pickup roller. It is linked to the upper guide so that it opens when the user opens the guide;...
Page 327 Chapter 8 　 F-8-33 3. When the upper guide is closed once again, the holding plate becomes locked in position once again. F-8-34 8-44...
Page 328: Registration Unit
Chapter 8 8.6 Registration Unit 8.6.1 Overview 0007-2213 The registration roller is driven by the main motor (M2). In between the registration roller and the main motor is the registration clutch (SL2), servicing to turn on and off the registration roller so that the paper will be matched in relation to the image on the drum at correct registration.
Page 329: Checking Horizontal Registration
Chapter 8 　 8.6.2 Checking Horizontal Registration 0007-2214 The machine does not have a mechanism to check horizontal registration for both 1st and 2nd sides of a print. The point of horizontal registration for the 2nd side may be adjusted in service mode (i.e., the image write start position).
Page 330: Duplex Feeding Unit
Chapter 8 8.7 Duplex Feeding Unit 8.7.1 Overview 0007-2218 ( iR2270 / iR2870 ) Inside the duplexing assembly are found two sets of rollers that are driven by the main motor (M2) and the duplexing clutch (CL6). Different sets of rollers are used to turn over the sheet for duplexing depending on whether or not the machine is equipped with a delivery accessory*: If a delivery accessory is present, the reversing rollers are used to turn over the sheet.
Page 331 Chapter 8 　 Configuration of Components If Without a Delivery Accessory F-8-36 [1] Delivery roller [2] Delivery sensor 1 (PS14) [3] Reversing flapper [4] Duplexing feeding roller 1 [5] Duplexing feed sensor (PS17) [6] Duplexing feeding roller 1 8-48...
Page 332 Chapter 8 Configuration of the Components If With a Delivery Accessory F-8-37 [1] Reversing roller [2] Reversal sensor (PS4A) [3] Duplexing inlet sensor (PS3A) [4] Duplexing inlet roller [5] Duplexing feeding roller 1 [6] Duplexing feed sensor (PS17) [7] Duplexing feeding roller 2 8-49...
Page 333: Overview
Chapter 8 　 8.7.2 Overview 0007-2221 ( iR3570 / iR4570 ) Inside the duplexing assembly are 2 sets of rollers that are driven by the duplexing motor (M10). F-8-38 [1] Reversing roller [2] Reversal sensor (PS4A) [3] Duplexing inlet sensor (PS3A) [4] Duplexing inlet roller [5] Duplexing feeding roller 1 [6] Duplexing feed sensor (PS17)
Page 334: Sequence Of Image Formation
Chapter 8 [7] Duplexing feeding roller 2 8.7.3 Sequence of Image Formation 0007-2223 The machine goes thorough the following sequence to form images when making double- sided copies/prints: - Configuration Without an Accessory Installed A4/LTR 1-2 2-2 1-1 3-2 2-1 4-2 3-1 4 sheets A4/LTR...
Page 335 Chapter 8 　 - Configuration with an Accessory Installed A4/LTR 1-2 2-2 1-1 3-2 2-1 4-2 3-1 4 sheets A4/LTR 2-2 1-1 3-2 4-1 5-1 5 sheets A4/LTR 2-2 1-1 3-2 4-2 3-1 4-1 6-2 5-1 6-1 6 sheets A3/LDR 3 sheets F-8-40 However, in the case of delivery to tray 3 (outside), the machine uses single-sheet...
Page 336 Chapter 8 8.7.4 Sequence of Image Formation 0007-8703 ( iR3570 / iR4570 ) The machine goes thorough the following sequence to form images when making double- sided copies/prints: A4/LTR 1-2 2-2 1-1 3-2 2-1 4-2 3-1 4 sheets A4/LTR 2-2 1-1 3-2 4-1 5-1 5 sheets A4/LTR...
Page 337 Chapter 8 　 5 sheets 1-1 2-2 2-1 5-2 5-1 indicates the 1st side of the 1st sheet indicates the 2nd side of the 1st sheet F-8-43 8-54...
Page 338: Flow Of Paper (W/O/ Delivery Option)
Chapter 8 8.7.5 Flow of Paper (w/o/ delivery option) 0007-3125 ( iR2270 / iR2870 ) A4/LTR, 5 Sheets A number in a circle indicates the 1st side, while a number in a square indicates the 2nd side. F-8-44 The 1st sheet is picked up. F-8-45 8-55...
Page 339 Chapter 8 　 An image is formed for the 2nd side of the 1st sheet. The 2nd sheet is picked up. F-8-46 The 1st sheet is turned over and moved to duplexing registration. An image is formed for the 2nd side of the 2nd sheet. F-8-47 8-56...
Page 340 Chapter 8 The 1st sheet is moved for registration once again. The 2nd sheet is turned over and moved for duplexing registration. The 3rd sheet is picked up. F-8-48 An image is formed for the 1st side of the 1st sheet and for the 2nd side of the 3rd sheet. The 2nd sheet is moved for duplexing.
Page 341 Chapter 8 　 The 1st sheet is delivered. The 3rd sheet is turned over and moved for duplexing registration. The 2nd sheet is moved for registration once again. The 4th sheet is picked up. F-8-50 An image is formed for the 1st side of the 2nd sheet and for the 2nd side of the 4th sheet. The 3rd sheet is moved for duplexing.
Page 342 Chapter 8 The 2nd sheet is delivered. The 4th sheet is reversed and is moved for duplexing registration. The 3rd sheet is picked for registration once again. The 5th sheet is picked up. F-8-52 An image is formed for the 1st side of the 3rd sheet and for the 2nd side of the 5th sheet. The 4th sheet is moved for duplexing.
Page 343 Chapter 8 　 The 3rd sheet is delivered. The 5th sheet is turned over and moved for registration. The 4th sheet is moved for registration once again. F-8-54 An image is formed for the 1st side of the 4th sheet. The 5th sheet is moved for duplexing. F-8-55 8-60...
Page 344 Chapter 8 The 4th sheet is delivered. The 5th sheet is moved for registration once again. F-8-56 An image is formed for the 1st side of the 5th sheet. F-8-57 The 5th sheet is delivered. 8-61...
Page 345: Flow Of Paper (W/ Delivery Option)
Chapter 8 　 8.7.6 Flow of Paper (w/ delivery option) 0007-3126 ( iR2270 / iR2870 ) A4/LTR, 5 Sheets, Delivery to Tray 1/2 A number in a circle indicates the 1st side, while a number in a square indicates the 2nd side. F-8-58 The 1st sheet is picked up.
Page 346 Chapter 8 An image is formed for the 2nd side of the 1st sheet. The 2nd sheet is picked up. F-8-60 The 1st sheet is turned over, and is moved for duplexing registration. An image is formed for the 2nd side of the 2nd sheet. F-8-61 8-63...
Page 347 Chapter 8 　 The 1st sheet is moved for registration once again. The 2nd sheet is turned over and moved for duplexing registration. The 3rd sheet is picked up. F-8-62 An image is formed for the 1st side of the 1st sheet and the 2nd side of the 3rd sheet. The 2nd sheet is moved for duplexing.
Page 348 Chapter 8 The 1st sheet is delivered. The 3rd sheet is turned over and is moved for duplexing registration. The 2nd sheet is moved for registration once again. The 4th sheet is picked up. F-8-64 An image is formed for the 1st side of the 2nd sheet and for the 2nd side of the 4th sheet. The 3rd sheet is moved for duplexing.
Page 349 Chapter 8 　 The 2nd sheet is delivered. The 4th sheet is turned over, and is moved for duplexing registration. The 3rd sheet is moved for registration once again. The 5th sheet is picked up. F-8-66 An image is formed for the 1st side of the 3rd sheet and for the 2nd side of the 5th sheet. The 5th sheet is moved for duplexing.
Page 350 Chapter 8 The 3rd sheet is delivered. The 5th sheet is turned over, and is moved for duplexing registration. The 4th sheet is moved for registration once again. F-8-68 An image is formed for the 1st side of the 4th sheet. The 5th sheet is moved for duplexing. F-8-69 8-67...
Page 351 Chapter 8 　 The 4th sheet is delivered. The 5th sheet is moved for registration once again. F-8-70 An image is formed for the 1st side of the 5th sheet. F-8-71 The 5th sheet is delivered. 8-68...
Page 352: Flow Of Paper
Chapter 8 8.7.7 Flow of Paper 0007-3407 ( iR3570 / iR4570 ) A4/LTR, 5 Sheets, Delivery to Tray 1/2 A number in a circle indicates the 1st side, while a number in a square indicates the 2nd side. F-8-72 The 1st sheet is picked up. F-8-73 8-69...
Page 353 Chapter 8 　 An image is formed for the 2nd side of the 1st sheet. The 2nd sheet is picked up. F-8-74 The 1st sheet is turned over, and is moved for duplexing registration. An image is formed for the 2nd side of the 2nd sheet. F-8-75 8-70...
Page 354 Chapter 8 The 1st sheet is moved for registration once again. The 2nd sheet is turned over and moved for duplexing registration. The 3rd sheet is picked up. F-8-76 An image is formed for the 1st side of the 1st sheet and the 2nd side of the 3rd sheet. The 2nd sheet is moved for duplexing.
Page 355 Chapter 8 　 The 1st sheet is delivered. The 3rd sheet is turned over and is moved for duplexing registration. The 2nd sheet is moved for registration once again. The 4th sheet is picked up. F-8-78 An image is formed for the 1st side of the 2nd sheet and for the 2nd side of the 4th sheet. The 3rd sheet is moved for duplexing.
Page 356 Chapter 8 The 2nd sheet is delivered. The 4th sheet is turned over, and is moved for duplexing registration. The 3rd sheet is moved for registration once again. The 5th sheet is picked up. F-8-80 An image is formed for the 1st side of the 3rd sheet and for the 2nd side of the 5th sheet. The 5th sheet is moved for duplexing.
Page 357 Chapter 8 　 The 3rd sheet is delivered. The 5th sheet is turned over, and is moved for duplexing registration. The 4th sheet is moved for registration once again. F-8-82 An image is formed for the 1st side of the 4th sheet. The 5th sheet is moved for duplexing. F-8-83 8-74...
Page 358 Chapter 8 The 4th sheet is delivered. The 5th sheet is moved for registration once again. F-8-84 An image is formed for the 1st side of the 5th sheet. F-8-85 The 5th sheet is delivered. 8-75...
Page 359: Parts Replacement Procedure
Chapter 8 　 8.8 Parts Replacement Procedure 8.8.1 Pick-up Unit 1 8.8.1.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) 0007-6551 1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if equipped with a 2-Cassette Pedestal-Y2) 2) Open the right lower door [2]. 3) Remove the 5 screws [3], and detach the right cover (rear) [4]. F-8-86 8-76...
Page 360 Chapter 8 8.8.1.2 Removing the Right Door 0007-7328 1) Open the right door. F-8-89 4) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the reuse band [2]; then, remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening). F-8-87 2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing plate [2].
Page 361 Chapter 8 　 F-8-91 Attaching the Right Door 1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the lug. 2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate.
Page 362: Pick-Up Unit 2
Chapter 8 3) Remove the 4 screws [1], and take out the pickup unit 1 [2]. F-8-95 F-8-93 8.8.2 Pick-up Unit 2 8.8.1.4 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1 0007-6554 8.8.2.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) 1) Slide out the cassette 1/2. 0007-6555 2) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1];...
Page 363: Pickup Roller
Chapter 8 　 assembly 2 [3]. F-8-96 F-8-97 8.8.3 Pickup Roller Point to Note When Replacing the Feed/ Separation Roller 1 8.8.3.1 Removing the The collar (roller core) of the machine's Pickup Roller/Feed feed/separation roller is black. Roller/Separation Roller 0007-6569 8.8.4 Sensor Mount 1) Slide out the cassette.
Page 364 Chapter 8 8.8.4.4 Removing the 8.8.4.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1 Pickup Assembly 2 0007-6564 0007-6565 1) Slide out the cassette 1/2. Refer to procedure 8.8.2 2) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1]; then, free the harness from the 2 wire saddles 8.8.4.6 Removing the [2] and the 2 clamps [3].
Page 365: Pick-Up Unit 1
Chapter 8 　 Pickup Unit 1 8.8.4.7 Mounting Sensor Mounting Plate 0007-6568 Take care not to orient the pickup unit facing down when mounting the sensor base; otherwise, the gears will fall out. 1) After fitting the bushing [1] to the frame, mount the gear shaft [2].
Page 366: Cassette Pick-Up Motor 1
Chapter 8 F-8-104 3) Mount the gear [1] and the E-ring [2]. F-8-105 Be sure not to leave out the pickup solenoid [1]. When mounting it, be sure that the stop [2] is fully engaged with the Try turning the gears to be sure that they cam gear [3].
Page 367 Chapter 8 　 F-8-107 2) Remove the 5 screws [1]. Remove the power cord base [2]. F-8-106 8.8.5.2 Removing the Right Cover (rear) F-8-108 0007-6988 Refer to procedure 8.8.1.1 3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1]. 8.8.5.3 Removing the Pickup Motor Base 0007-6983 1) Free the harness [1] from the 2 wire saddles [2].
Page 368: Cassette Pick-Up Motor 2
Chapter 8 F-8-109 4) Remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the pickup motor base [2]. F-8-111 8.8.6 Cassette Pick-up Motor 2 8.8.6.1 Removing the Rear Cover 0007-6598 1) Remove the 13 screws [1] and then the other screw [2]; then, detach the rear cover [3].
Page 369 Chapter 8 　 F-8-113 2) Remove the 5 screws [1]. Remove the power cord base [2]. F-8-112 8.8.6.2 Removing the Right Cover (rear) 0007-6599 F-8-114 Refer to procedure 8.8.1.1 3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1]. 8.8.6.3 Removing the Pickup Motor Base 0007-6990 1) Free the harness [1] from the 2 wire saddles [2].
Page 370: Cassette Size Sensor
Chapter 8 F-8-115 4) Remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the pickup motor base [2]. F-8-117 8.8.7 Cassette Size Sensor 8.8.7.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) 0007-6602 Refer to procedure 8.8.1.1 8.8.7.2 Removing the F-8-116 Right Door 0007-7335 Refer to procedure 8.8.1.2 8.8.6.4 Removing the Cassette Pickup Motor...
Page 371 Chapter 8 　 8.8.7.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1 0007-6609 Refer to procedure 8.8.1 8.8.7.6 Removing the Cassette Size Sensor 0007-6610 1) Remove the snap stop, and detach the PCB cover [1]. F-8-119 4) Remove the screw [1], and detach the cassette size sensor together with the PCB [2] (in the case of the size sensor 1, together with the size sensor 2;...
Page 372: Cassette Retry Paper Sensor
Chapter 8 8.8.8.2 Removing the Right Door 0007-7336 Refer to procedure 8.8.1.2 8.8.8.3 Removing the Right Cover (lower front) 0007-6613 Refer to procedure 8.8.1.3 8.8.8.4 Removing the F-8-121 Pickup Assembly 1 0007-6614 6) Detach the size sensor [1] from the PCB. Refer to procedure 8.8.1 8.8.8.5 Removing the...
Page 373: Cassette Paper Sensor
Chapter 8 　 8.8.9.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2 0007-6624 Refer to procedure 8.8.2 8.8.9.6 Removing the Sensor Mounting Plate 0007-6625 Refer to procedure 8.8.4.6 8.8.9.7 Removing the F-8-123 Cassette Paper Sensor 0007-6626 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and 8.8.9 Cassette Paper Sensor detach the cassette paper sensor [2].
Page 374: Slide Resistor
Chapter 8 8.8.10.2 Removing the Right Door 0007-7341 Refer to procedure 8.8.1.2 8.8.10.3 Removing the Right Cover (lower front) 0007-6632 Refer to procedure 8.8.1.3 8.8.10.4 Removing the F-8-125 Pickup Assembly 1 0007-6634 Refer to procedure 8.8.1 8.8.11 Slide Resistor 8.8.10.5 Removing the 8.8.11.1 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2 0007-6635...
Page 375: Cassette Pickup Solenoid
Chapter 8 　 F-8-126 F-8-128 3) Remove the manual feed tray unit [3]. 2) Remove the slide resistor [1] (connector [2]). F-8-127 F-8-129 8.8.11.5 Removing the Slide Resistor 0007-6651 8.8.12 Cassette Pickup 1) Remove 2 screws [1], and detach the Solenoid manual feed tray upper cover [2].
Page 376 Chapter 8 8.8.12.2 Removing the Right Door 0007-7345 1) Open the right door. F-8-132 4) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the reuse band [2]; then, remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening). F-8-130 2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing plate [2].
Page 377 Chapter 8 　 F-8-134 Attaching the Right Door 1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom of the right door against the lug. 2) Engage the hinge [2] found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate.
Page 378: Cassette Size Sensor Relay Pcb
Chapter 8 8.8.12.5 Removing the 8.8.13.3 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2 0007-6662 Right Cover (lower Refer to procedure 8.8.2 front) 0007-6669 8.8.12.6 Removing the Refer to procedure 8.8.1.3 Cassette Pickup 8.8.13.4 Removing the Solenoid 0007-6664 Pickup Assembly 1 0007-6670 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw [2];...
Page 379: Manual Tray Assembly
Chapter 8 　 F-8-139 F-8-138 3) Remove the manual feed tray unit [3]. 8.8.14 Manual Tray Assembly 8.8.14.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) 0007-6697 Refer to procedure 8.8.1.1 8.8.14.2 Removing the Right Door 0007-7350 F-8-140 Refer to procedure 8.8.1.2 8.8.15 Manual Feed Unit 8.8.14.3 Removing the Manual Feed Unit 0007-6699...
Page 380 Chapter 8 8.8.15.2 Removing the Right Door 0007-7351 Refer to procedure 8.8.1.2 8.8.15.3 Removing the Manual Feed Unit 0008-1017 1) Remove the manual upper guide link [1] (plastic E-ring [2] and boss [3]). F-8-142 3) Remove the connector cover [1] (snap- on).
Page 381: Manual Pickup Roller
Chapter 8 　 8.8.16.3 Removing the Manual Feed Unit 0007-6994 Refer to procedure 8.8.15 8.8.16.4 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Roller 0007-6713 1) Remove the manual feed upper cover [1] (snap-on). F-8-144 F-8-146 F-8-145 2) Remove the bush [2], and detach the 8.8.16 Manual Pickup Roller manual feed pickup roller [3] together with the shaft.
Page 382: Manual Pick-Up Clutch
Chapter 8 2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing plate [2]. F-8-147 F-8-149 8.8.17 Manual Pick-up Clutch 3) Remove the joint shaft [1], and free the extension delivery unit [2] from the right door. 8.8.17.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) 0007-6675 Refer to procedure 8.8.1.1 8.8.17.2 Removing the...
Page 383 Chapter 8 　 F-8-151 5) While freeing the hinge assembly [2], detach the right door. F-8-153 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to close the right F-8-152 door first. Attaching the Right Door 8.8.17.3 Removing the 1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom Rear Cover...
Page 384 Chapter 8 8.8.17.4 Removing the 8.8.17.5 Removing the Main Power Switch Manual Feed Pickup 0007-6679 Clutch 0007-6681 1) Remove the 4 fastons [1], and detach the main power switch [2]. (snap-on type) 1) Disconnect the connector (2P) [1]. 2) Free the clutch cable [2] from the wire saddle [3].
Page 385: Manual Separation Pad
Chapter 8 　 8.8.18 Manual Separation Pad 8.8.18.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) 0007-6714 Refer to procedure 8.8.1.1 8.8.18.2 Removing the Right Door 0007-7357 Refer to procedure 8.8.1.2 F-8-158 8.8.18.3 Removing the Manual Feed Unit 0007-6716 8.8.19 Registration Clutch Refer to procedure 8.8.15 8.8.19.1 Removing the 8.8.18.4 Removing the Rear Cover...
Page 386 Chapter 8 8.8.19.2 Removing the Main Drive Assembly 0007-6733 ( iR3570 / iR4570 ) 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the harness [2] from the wire saddle. F-8-159 2) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the main drive assembly [2]. F-8-160 Do not touch the screws that are glued in place.
Page 387 Chapter 8 　 8.8.19.3 Removing the Main Drive Assembly 0007-7530 ( iR2270 / iR2870 ) 1) Disconnect the 6 connectors [1]. 2) Free the cable from the 6 cable clamps [2]. 3) Remove the re-use band [3]. F-8-161 4) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the main drive assembly [2].
Page 388: Feeding Roller
Chapter 8 registration clutch [5]. 8.8.21.3 Removing the Right Cover (lower front) 0007-6739 Refer to procedure 8.8.1.3 8.8.21.4 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1 0007-6740 Refer to procedure 8.8.1 8.8.21.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2 F-8-163 0007-6741 Refer to procedure 8.8.2 8.8.20 Feeding Roller 8.8.21.6 Removing the Sensor Mounting Plate...
Page 389: Duplex Feed Roller 2
Chapter 8 　 8.8.22 Duplex Feed Roller 2 8.8.22.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) 0007-6744 Refer to procedure 8.8.1.1 8.8.22.2 Removing the Right Door 0007-7361 8.8.22.3 Removing the F-8-164 Duplex Feed Roller 2 0007-6748 1) Free the coil spring [1] and, at the same 2) Free the claw [A] of the bushing [1] at time, remove the E-ring [2] to pull out the front;...
Page 390: Duplex Feed Sensor
Chapter 8 8.8.23.2 Removing the Right Door 0007-7365 Refer to procedure 8.8.1.2 8.8.23.3 Removing the Duplex Feed Sensor 0007-6976 1) Remove the 2 screws (w/ collar) [1], and detach the transfer frame [2]. F-8-167 3) Remove the E-ring [1], and detach the duplex feed roller 2 [2].
Page 391: Duplex Feed Clutch
Chapter 8 　 F-8-171 F-8-170 2) Remove the duplex feed clutch [1]. 8.8.24 Duplex Feed Clutch 8.8.24.1 Removing the Rear Cover 0007-7324 ( iR2270 / iR2870 ) Refer to procedure 8.8.5.1 8.8.24.2 Removing the Duplex Feed Clutch F-8-172 0007-7325 ( iR2270 / iR2870 ) 8.8.25 Delivery Assembly 1 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 2 screws [2];...
Page 392 Chapter 8 2) Remove the screw [2]. 8.8.25.2 Removing the 3) Detach the delivery tray [3]. Front Cover Unit 0007-6763 1) Open the front cover [1]. F-8-175 F-8-173 8.8.25.4 Removing the Right Door 0007-7364 2) Remove the face cover rubber [1]. Refer to procedure 8.8.1.2 3) Remove the binding screw [2].
Page 393: Delivery Assembly 1
Chapter 8 　 from the machine. 2) Free the harness [2] from the cable clamp [3], and detach the 2 re-use bands. 3) Disconnect the connector [1] from the machine terminal. F-8-179 8.8.25.6 Removing the Delivery Assembly 1 0007-6776 F-8-177 1) Remove the delivery assembly 1 [1].
Page 394: Fixing/ Delivery Drive Assembly
Chapter 8 8.8.26 Fixing/ Delivery Drive Assembly 8.8.26.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) 0008-1513 Refer to procedure 8.8.1.1 8.8.26.2 Removing the F-8-181 Front Cover Unit 0007-6781 Refer to procedure 8.8.25.2 2) Disconcert the 3 connectors [1]. 8.8.26.3 Removing the Delivery Tray 0007-6783 Refer to procedure 8.8.25.3 8.8.26.4 Removing the...
Page 395 Chapter 8 　 F-8-183 4) Detach the fixing unit [1] toward the front. F-8-185 Do not touch the screw [1]. Turning it will change the pressure of the fixing assembly, which cannot be adjusted in the field, necessitating the replacement of the fixing F-8-184 assembly.
Page 396: Separation Roller
Chapter 8 cable clamp [2]. F-8-188 3) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the fixing/delivery drive assembly 1 [2]. F-8-186 8.8.26.7 Removing the Fixing/Delivery Drive Assembly 0007-6792 1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the harness cover [2]. F-8-189 8.8.27 Separation Roller 8.8.27.1 Removing the Pickup...
Page 397: Chapter 9　Fixing System
Chapter 9 　Fixing System...
Page 398 Contents Contents Chapter 9　Fixing System 9.1 Construction ....................... 9-1 9.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions .......... 9-1 9.1.2 Major Components....................9-2 9.2 Basic Sequence ......................9-3 9.2.1 Power-On Sequence .................... 9-3 9.2.2 Down Sequence....................9-3 9.3 Various Control Mechanisms ..................9-4 9.3.1 Controlling the Speed of the Fixing Film ............9-4 9.3.2 Controlling the Fixing Film Temperature ............9-5 9.3.3 Cleaning ......................9-8...
Page 399: Construction
Chapter 9 9.1 Construction 9.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions 0006-6002 The machine's fixing system has the following major functions: T-9-1 Item Description Fixing method by fixing film + pressure roller Fixing heater plate-type heater Control temperature 180 deg C (at PSTBY) Fixing drive control by control of fixing film speed Fixing temperature...
Page 400: Major Components
Chapter 9 　 9.1.2 Major Components 0006-6003 The machine's fixing system has the following major components: F-9-1 [1] Fixing heater [2] Fixing film unit [3] Pressure roller [4] Power supply brush [5] Film sensor [6] Delivery roller [7] Fixing inside delivery sensor flag [8] Cleaning roller...
Page 401: Basic Sequence
Chapter 9 9.2 Basic Sequence 9.2.1 Power-On Sequence 0006-6005 If the thermistor detection temperature is less than 100 deg C when the power is turned on or the sleep mode is released, the control described below is performed. 1. Increases the speed of the fixing motor in phases (1/4 speed to 1/2 speed and then to normal speed).
Page 402: Various Control Mechanisms
Chapter 9 　 9.3 Various Control Mechanisms 9.3.1 Controlling the Speed of the Fixing Film 9.3.1.1 Controlling the Fixing Film Speed in Response to Low Temperature 0006-6037 As in the morning, driving the fixing film in a low-temperature environment without warm- up could cause the film to become displaced.
Page 403: Controlling The Fixing Film Temperature
Chapter 9 [A]Paper feed direction [B]Speed sensor output [C]1 rotation of fixing film Timing of Control The speed of fixing film rotation is monitored at all times after the fixing motor goes on and its speed reaches a specific value. The speed of the fixing motor is then controlled so that it remains at a specific level at all times.
Page 404 Chapter 9 　 9.3.2.3 Controlling the Power Supply at Start-Up 0006-6583 When the thermistor detection temperature is 180 deg C or less, the power control to compensate for the heater, (varying according to input voltage and a heater resistor value) is performed so as to raise the temperature of the fixing unit to the required temperature for fixing in a short time.
Page 405 Chapter 9 A: start-up control B: copying temperature control C: 65 (%) power supply D: X (%) power supply E: Y (%) power supply 9.3.2.4 Copying Temperature Control 0006-6584 The machine uses this mechanism to control the temperature of the fixing heater to an optimum level while a recording medium is passing through the fixing film assembly;...
Page 406: Cleaning
Chapter 9 　 9.3.2.7 Temperature Control in Response to Change of Paper Size 0007-5454 The machine has a function to switch the paper size during continuous mode such as in rotation sort. When small-size paper is qenerated continuously, the temperature of the end portion of the fixing film rises.
Page 407: Detecting The Passage Of Paper
Chapter 9 will hold cleaning until the end of the ongoing last rotation. 2. If a jam has been removed, the machine starts cleaning at time of recovery, at 220 deg C and for 10 sec. 9.3.4 Detecting the Passage of Paper 9.3.4.1 Detecting the Passage of Paper 0006-6014 The paper passage detection configuration in the fixing unit is shown below.
Page 408: Protective Functions
Chapter 9 　 9.4 Protective Functions 9.4.1 Protective Functions 0006-6009 As part of its protective mechanism, the machine has a thermo switch, triacs, and a relay. Protective measures according to location are described below: 1. When the thermistor is out of order Software detects a failure, and the triac and the relay are turned off.
Page 409: Detecting An Error
Chapter 9 Protective Circuit Block Configuration Diagram DCON S_TH M_TH AC driver F-9-5 9.4.2 Detecting an Error 0006-6013 As part of its protective mechanism, the machine checks for the following error conditions: T-9-3 Error Detail Symptom Description code code E000 0000 The fixing temperature In the course of start-up control, the thermistor...
Page 410 Chapter 9 　 Error Detail Symptom Description code code E001 0000 The thermistor detects The thermistor detects 235 deg C for 200 msec overheating. or more continuously. 0001 A hardware circuit A hardware circuit detects overheating in detects overheating. relation to the thermistor (main or sub). 0002 The sub thermistor The thermistor detects 295 deg C or more for...
Page 411: Parts Replacement Procedure
Chapter 9 9.5 Parts Replacement Procedure 9.5.1 Fixing Unit 9.5.1.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) 0007-7874 1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if equipped with a 2-Cassette Pedestal-Y2) 2) Open the right lower door [2]. 3) Remove the 5 screws [3], and detach the right cover (rear) [4]. F-9-6 9.5.1.2 Removing the Right Door 0007-7880...
Page 412 Chapter 9 　 F-9-7 2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing plate [2]. F-9-8 3) Remove the joint shaft [1], and free the extension delivery unit [2] from the right door. F-9-9 9-14...
Page 413 Chapter 9 4) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the reuse band [2]; then, remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening). F-9-10 5) While freeing the hinge assembly [2], detach the right door. F-9-12 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to close the right door first.
Page 414: Pressure Roller
Chapter 9 　 9.5.2 Pressure Roller 9.5.2.1 Removing the Inside Delivery Cover Unit 0007-7910 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the inside delivery cover unit [2]. F-9-14 9.5.2.2 Removing the F-9-13 Grounding Plate 0007-7911 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the grounding plate [2].
Page 415 Chapter 9 9.5.2.3 Removing the Fixing Film Cover 0007-7912 1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and remove the self-tapping screw [2]; then, detach the fixing film cover [3]. F-9-16 F-9-18 F-9-17 When mounting the fixing film cover unit, be sure to check that it has not ridden over F-9-19 the emboss [1] indicated by the arrow in the figure before tightening the screw.
Page 416 Chapter 9 　 F-9-22 F-9-20 2) Remove the 2 screws [1]. F-9-23 When mounting the left side plate, be sure F-9-21 that it is correctly positioned so that the locking lever and the teeth are correctly 3) Slide the left side plate [1] in the engaged.
Page 417 Chapter 9 F-9-26 F-9-24 Do not touch the screw [1] used to keep the fixing assembly in place. Turning the 9.5.2.5 Releasing screw will change the pressure of the fixing Locking Plate 0007-7914 assembly, which cannot be adjusted in the 1) Turn the locking gear [1] in the direction field, necessitating the replacement of the of the arrow to release the locking roller.
Page 418 Chapter 9 　 F-9-28 F-9-30 9.5.2.6 Removing the 2) Lift the front of the pressure roller [1]. Fixing Film Unit 0007-7915 Refer to procedure 9.5.4 9.5.2.7 Removing the Inlet Guide 0007-7916 1) Slide the inlet guide [1] in the direction of the arrow to detach.
Page 419: Cleaning Roller
Chapter 9 shapes: one for the iR3570/4570 and the other for the iR2270/2870. If the machine is an iR2270/2870, be sure to pay attention to the direction of the protrusion of the insulating bush. F-9-32 Be sure to pay attention to the position and the orientation of the insulating bush.
Page 420: Fixing Film
Chapter 9 　 and detach the cleaning roller together 9.5.4 Fixing Film with the cleaning roller holder [2]. 9.5.4.1 Removing the Inside Delivery Cover Unit 0007-7898 Refer to procedure 9.5.2.1 9.5.4.2 Removing the Grounding Plate 0007-7899 F-9-35 Refer to procedure 9.5.2.2 2) Remove the cleaning roller holder [1].
Page 421 Chapter 9 F-9-37 F-9-39 2) While pushing down the release lever 4) Free the AC harness [1] from the edge (rear) [1], pull out the heater contact [2]. saddle [2]. F-9-38 F-9-40 3) Remove the screw [1], and free the AC 5) Free the relay connector [1] of the signal harness [2].
Page 422: Internal Delivery Sensor
Chapter 9 　 F-9-41 F-9-43 9.5.5 Internal Delivery Sensor 6) Disconnect the connector [2] from the relay connector [1]. 9.5.5.1 Removing the Inside Delivery Cover Unit 0007-7923 Refer to procedure 9.5.2.1 9.5.5.2 Removing the Grounding Plate 0007-7924 Refer to procedure 9.5.2.2 F-9-42 9.5.5.3 Removing the...
Page 423 Chapter 9 harness [2]. 9.5.5.5 Releasing Locking Plate 0007-7927 Refer to procedure 9.5.2.5 9.5.5.6 Removing the Fixing Film Unit 0007-7929 1) While pushing down the release lever (front) [1], pull out the heater contact [2]. F-9-46 4) Free the AC harness [1] from the edge saddle [2].
Page 424 Chapter 9 　 F-9-48 F-9-50 6) Disconnect the connector [2] from the 9.5.5.7 Removing the relay connector [1]. Inside Delivery Sensor 0007-7932 1) Disconnect the connector [2] of the harness [1]. F-9-49 7) Remove the fixing film unit [1]. F-9-51 2) Remove the front latch [2] of the inside delivery sensor [1];...
Page 425: Fixing Film Sensor
Chapter 9 F-9-53 F-9-52 2) Detach the harness [1] from the guide 9.5.6 Fixing Film Sensor [2]. 9.5.6.1 Removing the Inside Delivery Cover Unit 0007-7895 Refer to procedure 9.5.2.1 9.5.6.2 Removing the Grounding Plate 0007-7896 Refer to procedure 9.5.2.2 F-9-54 9.5.6.3 Removing the Fixing Film Sensor...
Page 426 Chapter 9 　 3) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the fixing film sensor [2]. F-9-55 9-28...
Page 427: Chapter 10　External And Controls
Chapter 10 　External and Controls...
Page 428 Contents Contents Chapter 10　External and Controls 10.1 Control Panel ......................10-1 10.1.1 Overview ......................10-1 10.1.2 LCD Indication Processing ................10-2 10.1.3 Adjustment of the LCD Contact ..............10-2 10.1.4 Functions of the Control Panel CPU............... 10-2 10.2 Counters ......................... 10-3 10.2.1 Overview ......................
Page 429 10.5.14 Motor of Main Drive Assembly ..............10-49 10.5.15 Fixing Driver Motor ..................10-51 10.5.16 Right Door ....................10-52 10.5.17 Circuit Braker ....................10-54...
Page 430: Control Panel
Chapter 10 10.1 Control Panel 10.1.1 Overview 0006-6159 The machine's control panel consists of the following PCBs, LCD, and touch panel: The major functions of the control panel are as follows: - LCD indication - contrast adjustment - touch switch input - hardware key input Main controller PCB Control panel control block...
Page 431: Lcd Indication Processing
Chapter 10 　 10.1.2 LCD Indication Processing 0006-6160 The CPU on the main controlled PCB sends data (display data) to the control panel CPU PCB as instructed by the program. The data is sent through the control panel PCB to reach the color LCD. 10.1.3 Adjustment of the LCD Contact 0006-6161 The machine is equipped with a density adjustment volume (VR6801) on its keypad PCB...
Page 432: Counters
Chapter 10 10.2 Counters 10.2.1 Overview 0006-5378 The machine is equipped with counters that keep track of printouts according to the type of printer unit. The counters are indicated in response to a press on the Check key on the control panel.
Page 433 Chapter 10 　 Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter 5 Counter 6 230V FRN *7 total 1 total (large) total (small) scan (total 1) indicated** indicated** 230V GER *8 total 1 total (large) total (small) scan (total 1) indicated** indicated** 230V AMS *9...
Page 434: Timing Of Increasing The Count
Chapter 10 5461/ 5469/ 5462 ** by default, not indicated; may be changed in service mode. *** '1' is set for the following service mode item: COPIER>OPTION>USE>CNT-SW. **** '1' is set for the following service mode item: COPIER>OPTION>USER>CNT-SW. 10.2.2 Timing of Increasing the Count 0006-5385 The timing at which the count is increased differs depending on the printing mode (single- sided or double-sided), target of delivery, and type of accessory:...
Page 435: Fans
Chapter 10 　 10.3 Fans 10.3.1 Overview 0006-5388 The names and the functions of the fans used in the machine are as follows: T-10-3 Notation Name Filter 2-speed Description control Heat discharge fan (rear) Present Used Cools the fixing assembly. Heat discharge fan (front) Present Used...
Page 436: 2-Speed Control
Chapter 10 10.3.2 2-Speed Control 0006-5389 The rotation of the 2 fans used in the machine is controlled to 2 different speeds by the voltage switchover circuit of the individual fans. DC controller PCB 24V or 13V Full-speed signal Voltage Clock signal Half-speed switching circuit...
Page 437 Chapter 10 　 - Single-Sided Printing T-10-5 Environment sensor (HU1) reading Full speed, half speed 30 deg C or ore Full speed Less hand 30 deg C Half speed Note 1: While the machine is in continuous printing mode, the insertion of one or more double- sided prints will start the control used for double-sided printing.
Page 438: Power Supply System
Chapter 10 10.4 Power Supply System 10.4.1 Power Supply 10.4.1.1 Route of Power Inside the Printer Unit 0008-0538 The machine's DC power is controlled by the printer unit power supply PCB. The following shows the functions of the individual power supply PCBs used or accessories and the distribution of power: T-10-6 Name...
Page 439 Chapter 10 　 Name Description Remarks All-night power supply Generates and supplies all-night power (3 VB). Reader heater (H5) Heater switch DADF High-voltage Reader heater (H6) power supply PCB Leakage breaker Cassette heater (H4) ELCB2 DC controller PCB Heater Printer Deck heater (H7) switch PCB unit...
Page 440 Chapter 10 10.4.1.2 Power Supply Route in the Reader Unit 0006-5393 The printer unit controller PCB generates the following DC voltages using the 13 VDC supplied by the printer unit: - 24 VDC (for motor drive) - 13 VDC (for LED array) - 5 VDC (for sensor drive) - 3.3 VDC (for IC drive/for CCD drive) 24 VDC power is used to drive the motors, while 13 VDC power is used to turn on the...
Page 441 Chapter 10 　 10.4.1.3 Timing of Supply to the Reader Unit 0006-5394 The reader unit is supplied with 24 VDC/1.3 VDC by the printer unit at such times as described below. Sleep mode Scan Standby Main power switch ON P ower plug content t o outlet PSTBY SCAN...
Page 442 Chapter 10 10.4.1.4 Connections to Various Accessories 0006-5395 The following diagram shows the connections between the printer unit and the various accessories used for the supply of power: F-10-7 [1] Printer unit power cable [2] DADF I/F cable [3] Finisher-Q3, Saddle Finisher-Q4 I/F cable [4] Pickup heater cable [5] Side deck heater cable [6] Side deck I/F cable...
Page 443: Rated Output Of The Dc Power Supply Pcb
Chapter 10 　 [A] DADF-N1 [B] Printer unit [C] Printer unit [D] 2-Cassette Pedestal-Y2 [E] Side Paper Deck-Q1 10.4.2 Rated Output of the DC Power Supply PCB 10.4.2.1 Rated Output of the Printer Unit Power Supply PCB 0006-5642 The following are the ratings and the tolerances of the printer unit power supply PCB: T-10-7 Output 13VA1...
Page 444 Chapter 10 10.4.2.2 Rated Output of the Controller Power Supply PCB 0006-5643 The following are the ratings and the power supply tolerances of the controller power supply PCB: T-10-8 Output All-night/non-all night non-all night non-all night Rated output 3.4V 5.1V Power supply tolerance +/-4% +/-3%...
Page 445: Protection Function
Chapter 10 　 10.4.2.4 Rated Output of the All-Night Power Supply PCB 0006-5646 The following are the ratings and the power supply tolerances of the all-night power supply PCB: T-10-10 Output All-night/non-all night all night Rated output 3.4V Power supply tolerance +/-3% 10.4.3 Protection Function 10.4.3.1 Protective Mechanisms...
Page 446: Backup Battery
Chapter 10 10.4.4 Backup Battery 10.4.4.1 Backup Battery 0008-0861 The controller PCB and the DC controller PCB are equipped with a lithium battery (1 pc. each) to serve as a source of power, backing up various data in the even of power failure. T-10-11 Controller PCB manganese dioxide lithium battery (3 V, 1000 mAh)
Page 447 Chapter 10 　 2-2. Sleep 3 When the machine is in sleep mode 3, only 3 VB is available. The machine will move to standby mode from sleep 3 in response to any of the following: - print job - press on the control panel power switch - incoming fax The following shows the sections of the machine that are provided with power in sleep 3: Main controller PCB...
Page 448 Chapter 10 10.4.5.2 Machine as Supplied with Power 0006-6167 - Standby Mode, Sleep Mode, AC Off Mode T-10-12 Stand-by Sleep mode AC off mode mode Remote 1 Remote 2 Reader unit non-all night 13VA2 non-all night 24VU2 DC controller PCB non-all night non-all night non-all night...
Page 449: Parts Replacement Procedure
Chapter 10 　 10.5 Parts Replacement Procedure 10.5.1 Main Drive Assembly 10.5.1.1 Removing the Rear Cover 0007-6423 1) Remove the 13 screws [1] and then the other screw [2]; then, detach the rear cover [3]. If the left cover (lower) has already been detached, the screw [3] should also have been removed.
Page 450 Chapter 10 10.5.1.2 Removing the Main Drive Assembly 0007-6424 iR3570 / iR4570 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the harness [2] from the wire saddle. F-10-10 2) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the main drive assembly [2]. F-10-11 Do not touch the screws that are glued in place.
Page 451 Chapter 10 　 10.5.1.3 Removing the Main Drive Assembly 0007-7367 ( iR2270 / iR2870 ) 1) Disconnect the 6 connectors [1]. 2) Free the cable from the 6 cable clamps [2]. 3) Remove the re-use band [3]. F-10-12 4) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the main drive assembly [2].
Page 452: Power Supply Unit
Chapter 10 10.5.2 Power Supply Unit 10.5.2.1 Removing the Rear Cover 0007-6375 Refer to procedure 10.5.1.1 10.5.2.2 Removing the Left Cover (lower) 0007-6376 1) Take out the cassettes 1 and 2 [1]. 2) Remove the 4 screws [2] and the other screw [3];...
Page 453 Chapter 10 　 10.5.2.4 Removing the Main Power Supply 0007-6379 1) Remove the screw [1], and disconnect the finisher connector [2]. F-10-17 4) Disconnect the 7 connectors [1], and free the harness from the 4 clamps [2]. F-10-15 2) Remove the screw [1], and disconnect the pedestal connector [2].
Page 454: Control Panel
Chapter 10 10.5.3 Control Panel 10.5.3.1 Removing the Control Panel 0007-6426 1) Remove the rubber cap [1], and remove the screw [2]. F-10-19 6) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the main power supply [2]. F-10-21 2) Open the right door [1]. F-10-20 F-10-22 3) Remove the 2 screws [1].
Page 455: Control Panel Lcd Unit
Chapter 10 　 6) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the control panel. F-10-23 F-10-26 4) Slide the control panel [1] in the direction of the arrow. 10.5.4 Control Panel LCD Unit 10.5.4.1 Removing the Control Panel 0007-7569 Refer to procedure 10.5.3 10.5.4.2 Removing the F-10-24 Control Panel Base...
Page 456 Chapter 10 F-10-27 F-10-28 10.5.4.3 Removing the Control Panel Inside 4) Remove the control panel inside frame Frame 0007-7573 [1]. (2 TP screws [2], and 11 self- 1) Disconnect the 2 connectors between tapping screws [3]) the control panel PCB and the control panel key switch PCB;...
Page 457: Removing The Dc Controller Pcb
Chapter 10 　 10.5.4.4 Removing the Control Panel LCD 0007-7575 1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the control panel LCD [2]. F-10-30 F-10-31 10.5.5 Removing the DC Controller PCB How to Remove the Flexible Cable [1] 10.5.5.1 Removing the Rear Cover 0007-7370 Refer to procedure 10.5.1.1...
Page 458: Control Panel Inverter Pcb
Chapter 10 10.5.6 Control Panel Inverter 10.5.6.1 Removing the Control Panel 0007-6428 Refer to procedure 10.5.3 10.5.6.2 Removing the Control Panel Base F-10-33 Cover 0007-6430 Refer to procedure 10.5.4.2 10.5.6.3 Removing the Points to Note When Replacing the DC Control Panel Inverter Controller PCB Be sure to remove the boot ROM [1] from 0007-6466...
Page 459: Control Panel Key Switch Pcb
Chapter 10 　 10.5.7 Control Panel Key 10.5.7.4 Removing the Control Panel Switch PCB Switch PCB 0007-6451 1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [3] between 10.5.7.1 Removing the the control panel PCB and the control Control Panel 0007-6437 panel LCD. Refer to procedure 10.5.3 10.5.7.2 Removing the Be sure to move the stopper in the direction Control Panel Base...
Page 460: Control Panel Cpu Pcb
Chapter 10 10.5.8.2 Removing the Control Panel Base Cover 0007-7566 Refer to procedure 10.5.4.2 10.5.8.3 Removing the Controller Panel CPU 0007-7567 1) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1] of the cable used between control panel PCB and the control panel key switch PCB. F-10-37 2) Disconnect the 2 connectors [2] used between the control panel PCB and the...
Page 461: All Night Power Supply Pcb
Chapter 10 　 10.5.9 All Night Power Supply 10.5.9.1 Removing the Rear Cover 0007-6385 Refer to procedure 10.5.1.1 10.5.9.2 Removing the All-Night Power F-10-41 Supply PCB 0007-6386 1) Disconnect the 4 connectors [1]. 10.5.10 Controller Power Supply PCB 10.5.10.1 Removing the Rear Cover 0007-6380 Refer to procedure 10.5.1.1...
Page 462 Chapter 10 10.5.10.3 Removing the Left Cover (Rear) 0007-6382 1) Remove the 2 screws [1]; then, detach the left cover (rear) [2]. F-10-43 2) Remove the 6 screws [1], and detach the F-10-42 controller power supply PCB [2]. 10.5.10.4 Removing the Accessories Power Supply PCB...
Page 463: Option Power Supply Pcb
Chapter 10 　 10.5.11 Option Power Supply 10.5.11.1 Removing the Rear Cover 0007-6370 Refer to procedure 10.5.1.1 10.5.11.2 Removing the F-10-46 Left Cover (lower) 0007-6371 Refer to procedure 10.5.2.2 3) Remove the 5 binding screws [1], and detach the accessories power supply 10.5.11.3 Removing the PCB [2].
Page 464: High-Voltage Pcb
Chapter 10 10.5.12 High-Voltage PCB 10.5.12.2 Removing the Waste Toner Case 0007-8028 10.5.12.1 Removing the 1) Remove the waste toner case [1]. Front Cover Unit 0007-8021 1) Open the front cover [1]. F-10-50 10.5.12.3 Removing the F-10-48 Toner Cartridge 0007-8400 2) Remove the face cover rubber [1].
Page 465 Chapter 10 　 F-10-52 F-10-54 10.5.12.4 Removing the 3) Shift the locking lever [1] to the left to release the developing assembly. Drum Unit 0007-8401 1) Open the right door [1]. F-10-55 F-10-53 4) Remove the screw [1]. 2) Remove the screw [1]. 10-36...
Page 466 Chapter 10 F-10-56 5) Remove the drum unit [1]. F-10-58 10.5.12.5 Removing the Developing Assembly 0007-8402 F-10-57 1) Remove the screw [1]. Be sure to hold the drum unit as shown. F-10-59 10-37...
Page 467 Chapter 10 　 2) Shift the locking lever [1] to the left to release the developing assembly. F-10-60 3) Slide the developing assembly [1] slightly to the front; then, disconnect the connector [2]. F-10-61 4) Remove the developing assembly [1]. F-10-62 10-38...
Page 468 Chapter 10 Be sure to hold the developing assembly as shown. F-10-64 10.5.12.6 Removing the Upper Tray 0007-8403 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the upper tray [2]. F-10-63 When fitting the developing assembly, be sure to fit the lower right segment [2] of the developing assembly [1] in the rail [3] of machine.
Page 469 Chapter 10 　 disconnect the 2 relay connectors [2]. Reference: Lift the front of the upper tray [1], and detach it as if to slide it toward the front. F-10-68 F-10-66 2) While freeing the lock [1] toward the right, detach the pre-exposure lamp [2]. 10.5.12.7 Removing the Toner Cartridge Cover 0007-8404...
Page 470 Chapter 10 10.5.12.10 Removing the Laser Unit 0007-8409 1) Open the 2 wire saddles [1], and disconnect the 2 connectors [2]. F-10-70 10.5.12.9 Removing the Left Cover 0007-8407 1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the left cover [2]. F-10-72 When have...
Page 471 Chapter 10 　 F-10-73 3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing [2]. F-10-75 When sliding out the laser scanner unit, be sure to take care not to touch the PCB mounted to the laser scanner unit. (The PCB is equipped with a laser scanner intensity adjustment variable resistor, and contact with the PCB can change the adjustment setting.)
Page 472 Chapter 10 in the plate. 10.5.12.11 Removing the Hopper Assembly 0007-8411 1) Remove the inside base cover [1] and the inside right color [2]. F-10-78 4) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the hopper assembly [2]. F-10-76 2) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1] found at the front and the connector [2] found at the rear.
Page 473 Chapter 10 　 F-10-80 F-10-82 10.5.12.12 Removing 3) Remove the 4 screws [1]. the Right Cover (rear) 0007-8412 Refer to procedure 10.5.16.1 10.5.12.13 Removing the Fixing Unit 0007-8419 1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the harness cover [2]. F-10-83 4) Detach the fixing unit [1] toward the front.
Page 474 Chapter 10 F-10-84 When mounting the harness cover [1], be sure to keep the harness [2] within the space [3] indicated in the figure so that the harness [2] will not come into contact with the gear [4]. F-10-85 Do not touch the screw [1]. Turning it will change the pressure of the fixing assembly, which cannot be adjusted in the field, necessitating the replacement of the fixing...
Page 475 Chapter 10 　 F-10-88 10.5.12.15 Removing the High-Voltage PCB 0007-8422 1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the F-10-86 fixing member [2]. 10.5.12.14 Removing the Gear 0007-8420 1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the gear cover [2]. F-10-89 2) Slide the guide [1] as shown to detach.
Page 476: Exhaust Fan
Chapter 10 F-10-90 3) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the latch [2] and 3 screws [3]; F-10-92 then, detach the high-voltage PCB [4]. 10.5.13 Exhaust Fan 10.5.13.1 Removing the Heat Discharge Fan 0007-9500 1) Open the right door. F-10-91 F-10-93 2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing plate [2].
Page 477 Chapter 10 　 F-10-94 F-10-96 3) Remove the feed guide [1]. 5) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the heat discharge fan [2]. F-10-95 4) Remove the 7 screws [1], and detach the F-10-97 feed guide (lower) [2]. 10-48...
Page 478: Motor Of Main Drive Assembly
Chapter 10 10.5.14 Motor of Main Drive Assembly 10.5.14.1 Removing the Rear Cover 0007-7368 Refer to procedure 10.5.1.1 10.5.14.2 Removing the Main Drive Assembly 0007-6418 (iR3570 / iR4570 ) 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the harness [2] from the wire saddle. F-10-99 F-10-98 2) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the...
Page 479 Chapter 10 　 10.5.14.3 Removing the Main Drive Motor 0007-6421 (iR3570 / iR4570 ) 1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the main drive motor [2]. F-10-101 Adjusting the Tension of the Main Drive F-10-100 Motor 1) Temporarily fix the main drive motor in place to the main motor base.
Page 480: Fixing Driver Motor
Chapter 10 3) Tighten the screws [1] of the main drive motor in the order indicated. F-10-103 F-10-105 10.5.14.4 Removing the 10.5.15 Fixing Driver Motor Main Drive Motor 0007-7369 (iR2270 / iR2870 ) 10.5.15.1 Removing the Rear Cover 1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1]. 0007-6403 Refer to procedure 10.5.1.1 10.5.15.2 Removing the...
Page 481: Right Door
Chapter 10 　 right cover (rear) [4]. F-10-106 2) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the fixing drive motor [2]. F-10-108 10.5.16.2 Removing the Right Door 0007-7026 1) Open the right door. F-10-107 10.5.16 Right Door 10.5.16.1 Removing the Right Cover (rear) 0007-7020 F-10-109...
Page 482 Chapter 10 F-10-110 F-10-112 3) Remove the joint shaft [1], and free the 5) While freeing the hinge assembly [2], extension delivery unit [2] from the right detach the right door. door. F-10-113 F-10-111 Attaching the Right Door 4) Disconnect the connector [1], and 1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom remove the reuse band [2];...
Page 483: Circuit Braker
Chapter 10 　 F-10-115 2) Remove the 4 fastons [1], and detach the circuit breaker [2]. F-10-114 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to close the right door first. 10.5.17 Circuit Braker F-10-116 10.5.17.1 Removing the Rear Cover...
Page 484 Chapter 10 Points to Note When Mounting When mounting the circuit breaker, be sure that the AC harness is identified correctly by color as shown. F-10-117 10-55...
Page 485: Chapter 11　Meap
Chapter 11　 MEAP...
Page 486 Contents Contents 11.1 Overview ....................11-1 11.2 MEAP Counter..................11-2 11.3 Construction of the MEAP Platform............11-4...
Page 487: Overview
Chapter 11 11.1 Overview 0008-1396 The term MEAP stands for Multifunctional Embedded Application Platform, and is used to generically refer to a platform for software built into MFPs and peripheral equipment. The architecture is based on Java (J2ME, i.e., Java 2 Platform Micro Edition), and is designed to enable the execution of Java applications.
Page 488: Meap Counter
Chapter 11 　 11.2 MEAP Counter 0008-1397 In addition to the commonly found print counters, a device that supports MEAP is equipped with a counter mechanism used to keep track of which functions are used as well as how often they are used for individual MEAP applications that are installed. The MEAP counter readings may be checked by making the following selections on the device control panel: Counter Check Key>MEAP Counter Check.
Page 489 Chapter 11 Type Count item free 7 free 8 free 9 free 10 free 11 free 12 Notes: forced: the device forces the counter to increase its reading in response to execution of a job. in response to instructions from application: the counter increases its reading only in response to instructions from the application.
Page 490: Construction Of The Meap Platform
Chapter 11 　 11.3 Construction of the MEAP Platform 0008-1398 In addition to the installation of the system software, language file, and RUI, a printer equipped with MEAP functions calls for the installation of MEAP content, which offers functions (system services) needed to run MEAP applications and class libraries needed by the MEAP applications to control the device.
Page 491: Chapter 12　Maintenance And Inspection
Chapter 12 　Maintenance and Inspection...
Page 492 Contents Contents Chapter 12　Maintenance and Inspection 12.1 Periodically Replaced Parts ................... 12-1 12.1.1 Overview......................12-1 12.1.2 Reader Unit ..................... 12-1 12.1.3 Printer Unit...................... 12-1 12.2 Durables and Consumables..................12-2 12.2.1 Overview......................12-2 12.2.2 Reader Unit ..................... 12-2 12.2.3 Printer Unit...................... 12-2 12.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure ..............
Page 493: Periodically Replaced Parts
Chapter 12 12.1 Periodically Replaced Parts 12.1.1 Overview 0007-4595 The machine has parts that must be replaced on a periodical basis to ensure a specific level of functional performance. (The loss of the function of any of these parts will significantly affect the machine performance, regardless of the presence/absence of external changes or damage.) If possible, schedule the replacement so that it coincides with a scheduled service visit.
Page 494: Durables And Consumables
Chapter 12 　 12.2 Durables and Consumables 12.2.1 Overview 0007-4598 The machine has parts that may require replacement once or more during the period of product warranty because of wear or damage. Replace them as needed by referring to their indicated estimated lives.
Page 495 Chapter 12 As of Sept. 2004 Ref. Parts name Parts No. Q'ty Life Remarks Fixing film unit FM2-0293-000 150,000 iR2270/2870 prints 100V Fixing film unit FM2-0358-000 150,000 iR2270/2870 prints 115V Fixing film unit FM2-0359-000 150,000 iR2270/2870 prints 230V Fixing film unit FM2-1792-000 240,000 iR3570/4570...
Page 496 Chapter 12 　 As of Sept. 2004 Ref. Parts name Parts No. Q'ty Life Remarks [11] Manual feed pickup FB1-8581-000 240,000 roller prints [12] Heat discharge fan filter FC5-1546-000 100,000 prints [13] Pressure roller bushing RS5-1446-000 100,000 iR2270/2870 prints The value is the mean value collected from the results of evaluation. The parts number may change because of changes in design.
Page 497 Chapter 12 [13] [13] [12] [11] [12] [10] F-12-1 12-5...
Page 498: Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure
Chapter 12 　 12.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure 12.3.1 Scheduled Servicing for the Reader Unit 0007-5055 The reader unit does not have items that require scheduled servicing. Be sure to clean the copyboard glass and the ADF reading glass during every service visit. 12.3.2 Scheduled Servicing for the Printer Unit 0007-5176 Do not use solvents or oils other than those indicated.
Page 499 Chapter 12 Devel Location Photosensitive drum butting spacer/ oping feed guide assem Task clean:(dry wiping) Interval 120,000 prints Remarks [1]Photosensitive drum butting spacer [2]Feed guide 12-7...
Page 500 Chapter 12 　 Fixing Location Fixing inlet guide assem Task clean:(dry wiping/alcohol) Interval 120,000 prints Remarks [1]Fixing inlet guide Location Film bias static eliminator Task clean Interval 150,000 prints (iR2270/2870) 240,000 prints (iR3570/4570) Remarks [1]Film bias static eliminator 12-8...
Page 501: Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedures
Chapter 12 Laser Location Dust-blocking glass scann Task clean:(dry wiping or alcohol) Interval 120,000 prints assem Remarks [1]Dust-blocking glass The foregoing values are estimates only, and are subject to change depending on future data. 12.3.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedures 0007-5173 - As a rule, perform scheduled servicing every 120,000 prints.
Page 502 Chapter 12 　 1) Report to the person in change, and have an understanding of the situation. 2) Record the counter reading, and check the faulty prints. 3) Check the following items, and adjust or clean the parts as needed. T-12-3 Item Test copy...
Page 503: Points To Note About The Scheduled Servicing
Chapter 12 5) Clean the copyboard glass and the reading glass. 6) Make test copies. 7) Make sample copies. 8) Check the operation of the leakage breaker. While the machine is supplied with power (power switch ON), press the test switch of the leakage breaker to see if the breaker operates normally (i.e., the lever will shift to OFF to cut off the power).
Page 504 Chapter 12 　 F-12-2 [1]Copyboard glass, reading glass (clean, using water or mild detergent) [2]Transfer/feed guide (clean; dry wiping) [3]Fixing inlet guide (clean; dry wiping; alcohol) [4]Photosensitive drum butting spacer (clean; dry wiping) [5]Dust-blocking glass (clean; dry wiping or with alcohol) [6]Waste toner collection case (check) [7]Leakage breaker (check) [8]Film bias static eliminator (clean)
Page 505: Cleaning
Chapter 12 12.4 Cleaning 12.4.1 Cleaning the Transfer/Feed Guide 0007-5129 1) Open the right door. F-12-3 2) Clean (dry wipe) the feed guide [1] and the transfer guide [2]. F-12-4 3) Close the right door. 12-13...
Page 506: Cleaning The Developing Assembly Spacer, Feed Guide, Dust-Blocking Glass, And Fixing Inlet Guide
Chapter 12 　 12.4.2 Cleaning the Developing Assembly Spacer, Feed Guide, Dust-Blocking Glass, and Fixing Inlet Guide 0007-5128 A. Preparatory Work 1) Open the upper front cover [1]. F-12-5 2) Remove the face rubber [1] and the 2 screws [2]; then, slide the front cover unit [3] to the left to detach.
Page 507 Chapter 12 3) Remove the waste toner box [1]. F-12-7 4) Open the right door [1]. F-12-8 12-15...
Page 508 Chapter 12 　 5) Remove the locking screw [1] of the pressure lever. F-12-9 6) Shift the locking lever [1] of the developing assembly to the left to release the developing assembly. F-12-10 12-16...
Page 509 Chapter 12 7) Remove the screw (M5) [1]. F-12-11 8) Remove the drum unit [1]. F-12-12 - Do not touch the surface of the photosensitive drum. - Do not expose the surface of the photosensitive drum to light more than necessary. - Do not touch the spur of the drum unit.
Page 510 Chapter 12 　 9) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the developing assembly [2]. F-12-13 B. Cleaning the Developing Spacer and the Feed Guide 1) Clean the developing assembly spacer [1] and the feed guide [2]. (Dry wipe them using lint-free paper.) F-12-14 12-18...
Page 511 Chapter 12 C. Cleaning the Dust-Blocking Glass 1) Clean the dust-blocking glass [1]. (Dry wipe it, or use alcohol.) F-12-15 D. Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide 1) Remove the screw (w/ washer) [1], and detach the fixing inlet guide (upper) [2]. F-12-16 12-19...
Page 512 Chapter 12 　 2) Clean the fixing inlet guide (upper) [1] with alcohol. Be sure to completely remove all toner sticking to the fixing inlet guide (upper). F-12-17 3) Clean the fixing inlet guide (lower) [1] using lint-free paper. F-12-18 4) Mount the fixing inlet guide (upper) using a screw (w/ washer).
Page 513 Chapter 12 F-12-19 2) Secure the drum unit in place using a screw (M5) [1]. F-12-20 3) Put the developing unit in the machine. 3-1) Place segment A of the developing assembly on segment B of the developing assembly rail. 3-2) By sliding the base [2] of the developing assembly [1] along the developing assembly rail [3], fit the assembly in place inside the machine.
Page 514 Chapter 12 　 F-12-21 4) Connect the connector [1], and push the developing assembly [2] all the way in. F-12-22 12-22...
Page 515 Chapter 12 5) Shift back the locking lever [1] of the developing assembly to the right to lock the assembly in place. F-12-23 6) Fit and tighten the screw [1] of the locking lever. F-12-24 7) Close the right door. 12-23...
Page 516 Chapter 12 　 8) Fit the waste toner box [1]. F-12-25 9) Mount the front cover unit [3] using 2 screws [2], and fit the face rubber [1]. At this time, be sure to slide it to the right so that the claw of the front cover matches the machine.
Page 517: Cleaning The Film Bias Static Eliminator
Chapter 12 10) Close the upper front cover [1]. F-12-27 12.4.3 Cleaning the Film Bias Static Eliminator 0007-9152 A. Removing the Right Door 1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if w/ Cassette Feeding Unit) 2) Open the lower right door [2]. 3) Remove the 5 screws [3], and detach the right cover (rear) [4].
Page 518 Chapter 12 　 4) Open the right door. F-12-29 5) Remove the self-tapping screw [1], and detach the fixing plate [2]. F-12-30 12-26...
Page 519 Chapter 12 6) Remove the joint shaft [1], and detach the extension delivery unit [2] from the right door. F-12-31 7) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the reuse band [2]; then, remove the 2 screws (M4x8; RS tightening) [3]. F-12-32 12-27...
Page 520 Chapter 12 　 8) Free and detach the right door [1] from the hinge assembly [2]. F-12-33 B. Removing the Fixing Assembly 1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the harness cover [2]. F-12-34 12-28...
Page 521 Chapter 12 2) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1]. F-12-35 3) Remove the 4 screws [1]. F-12-36 12-29...
Page 522 Chapter 12 　 4) Remove the fixing unit [1] toward the front. F-12-37 C. Cleaning the Film Bias Static Eliminator 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the grounding plate [2]. F-12-38 12-30...
Page 523 Chapter 12 2) Clean the film bias static eliminator [1] found behind the grounding plate (to remove the cake of toner, if any, that may have collected on the static eliminator). F-12-39 3) Mount the grounding plate [2] with 2 screws. F-12-40 12-31...
Page 524 Chapter 12 　 D. Mounting the Fixing Assembly 1) Mount the fixing unit [1] to the machine frame. F-12-41 2) Secure the fixing assembly in place using 4 screws [1]. F-12-42 12-32...
Page 525 Chapter 12 3) Connect the 3 connectors [1]. F-12-43 4) Mount the harness cover [2] using a screw [1]. F-12-44 12-33...
Page 526 Chapter 12 　 E. Mounting the Right Door 1) Match the hole [1] of the right door bottom and the pin [2]. F-12-45 2) Match the mounting plate [1] of the right door top against the hook [2], and mount the right door.
Page 527 Chapter 12 6) Lift the expansion delivery kit [1] slightly to match it against the right door [2]. F-12-47 When matching the position, take care so that the expansion delivery kit will not open wider than 80 deg. 7) Push in the pin [1] through the hole [2] until it stops; then, connect the expansion delivery kit [3] to the right door [4].
Page 528 Chapter 12 　 F-12-49 Check to be sure that the joint pin is fully fitted as shown in the figure. 8) Using the self-tapping screw [1] you removed in step A-5), fix the joint plate [2] in place. Check to be sure that the protrusion [3] of the joint plate is fully in the mounting hole. F-12-50 12-36...
Page 529 Chapter 12 10) Mount the right cover (rear) using 5 screws. Take care not to trap the harness [1] by the cut-off [2] of the right cover (rear). F-12-51 11) Close the right door. 12-37...
Page 530: Chapter 13　Standards And Adjustments
Chapter 13 　Standards and Adjustments...
Page 531 Contents Contents Chapter 13　Standards and Adjustments 13.1 Image Adjustments ....................13-1 13.1.1 Standards for Image Position ................13-1 13.1.2 Adjusting the Image Position ................13-1 13.1.3 Cassette ......................13-3 13.1.4 Manual Feed Tray ................... 13-6 13.1.5 Side Paper Deck ....................13-7 13.2 Scanning System....................
Page 532: Image Adjustments
Chapter 13 13.1 Image Adjustments 2.5 1.5mm 2nd side of double-sided copy 2.5 1.5mm 13.1.1 Standards for Image Position 0007-4812 A print made at a magnification of 100% 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 F-13-3 must meet the following standards for image margin/non-image width: - Left/Right Non-Image Width - Margin Along the Leading Edge...
Page 533 Chapter 13 　 COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ- REGIST REFE Decrease the REGIST setting. Image left edge (a decrease of '10' will increase the margin by 1 mm) Increase the Decrease the 1st side of copy : 2.5 1.5mm ADFJ-REFE value.
Page 534: Cassette
Chapter 13 Paper left edge Image edge Decrease the Increase the Decrease the value of ADJ-Y. Increase the ADJ-Y setting. ADJ-RE-L setting ADJ-RE-L setting. (a decrease of '10' will (an increase of '10' will (a decrease of '1' will (an increase of '1' will decrease the non-image increase the non-image increase the margin...
Page 535 Chapter 13 　 A-1.　Adjusting the Cassette 1 (left/ right image margin; 1st side) 4) Remove the 2 claws [2], and detach the grip (right front) [1]. F-13-13 F-13-11 5) Loosen the fixing screw [2] on the 2) Take out the cassette 1 or 2. horizontal registration adjusting plate [1] (in the case of a 2-cassette pedestal, the of the cassette.
Page 536 Chapter 13 F-13-15 F-13-14 6)　Tighten the fixing screw. 7) Loosen the fixing screw. 8) Put the cassette 1 back in place. 7)　Put the cassette 2 back in place. 9) Make a copy using the cassette 1 as the 8)　Make a copy using the cassette 2 as source of paper, and check to make sure the source of paper, and check to make sure that the marking is as indicated.
Page 537: Manual Feed Tray
Chapter 13 　 Paper left edge Paper left edge Decrease the Decrease the Increase the Increase the ADJ-EFE setting. ADJ-REF-L setting. ADJ-REFEsetting. ADJ-REF-L setting. (an increase of '1' will (a decrease of '1' (a decrease of (an increase of '1' increase the margin by will increase the '1' willdecrease...
Page 538: Side Paper Deck
Chapter 13 - If not as indicated, make the following 13.1.5 Side Paper adjustments: Deck 0007-4911 3) Remove the paper from the manual feed tray. 1) Check to make sure that the 4 adjusters 4) Loosen the fixing screw [1] on the upper [1] of the pedestal of the host machine over of the manual feed d tray.
Page 539 Chapter 13 　 following: 2) Slide out the compartment. 3) Turn the 2 screws [2] to adjust the mounting position of the latch plate [1] of the deck open solenoid (SL2D) found at the left rear. At this time, use the index [3] of the latch plate as a reference.
Page 540: Scanning System
Chapter 13 label. 13.2 Scanning System Reference: 13.2.1 After At time of shipment from the factory, no CIS label is attached. Replacement the CIS 0007-9838 13.2.2 After Be sure to enter the value indicated on the Replacing CIS label attached to the contact image Reader Controller sensor (CIS) using the following service PCB or Initializing...
Page 541 Chapter 13 　 (found behind the left cover of the reader unit) 1) Enter the following values by referring to the values indicated on the P-PRINT a-1. CIS read position adjustment (for page you have previously printed out. fixed reading) 　a.
Page 542 Chapter 13 When you have made all the foregoing adjustments, put the P-PRINT page [1] in the service book case, and dispose of the previous printout. F-13-22 13-11...
Page 543: Laser Exposure System
Chapter 13 　 13.3 Laser Exposure System 13.3.1 After Replacing Laser Scanner Unit 0007-5178 Enter the values recorded on the label on the laser scanner unit for the following in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>LASER>LA- DELAY 13-12...
Page 544: Image Formation System
Chapter 13 GAMMA. 13.4 Image Formation 3) Press the OK key. System - The machine will pick up paper from cassette 1 (regardless of the size of the 13.4.1 After paper inside the cassette). - If no paper exists in cassette 1, the Replacing machine will try to find paper in the Developing Unit...
Page 545: Electrical Components
Chapter 13 　 system software. 13.5 Electrical 2) Using the following service mode item, Components initialize the memory of the DC controller PCB: 13.5.1 After COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>DC- Replacing 0007-8275 3) Using the following service mode items, enter the values indicated on the P-PRINT 1) Format the HDD.
Page 546: After Replacing The Main Controller Pcb
Chapter 13 card ID used by NSA. If you have replaced 4) Execute the following service mode the main controller, you will have to items: download the card data from NSA once - COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > D- again to permit NSA to perform statistical GAMMA operations.
Page 547 Chapter 13 　 9) Hold down the control panel power 13.5.4 After switch for 3 sec or more. Replacing 10) Go through the instructions on the Main Controller control panel for shut-down sequence so that the main power switch may be turned 0007-9204 off.
Page 548 Chapter 13 operations. off. If you have formatted the HDD and 11) Turn off the main power switch. Wait downloaded the system software, you will for 3 sec or more, and turn it back on. have to go through a specific set of steps: Unless you have registered 'system control group ID' and 'system control ID 1) Format the HDD.
Page 549: After Replacing The Reader Controller Pcb
Chapter 13 　 a-2. main scanning direction position 13.5.5 After adjustment (for fixed reading) Replacing 　　　C O P I E R > A D J U S T > A D J - Reader Controller XY>ADJ-Y a-3. shading position adjustment (for 0007-9843 fixed reading) - Before replacing the reader controller...
Page 550 Chapter 13 　　C O P I E R > A D J S U T > A D J - XY>ADJ-Y-DF 　b. original stop position adjustment 　　FEEDER>ADJSUT>DOCST 　c. original feed speed (magnification) adjustment 　　FEEDER>ADUST>LA-SPEED 2)　Make adjustments using the following service mode items: F-13-25 　a.
Page 551: Pickup/Feeding System
Chapter 13 　 3) Open the lower right cover [2]; then, 13.6 Pickup/Feeding remove the 2 screws [3], and detach the System cover (lower front) [4]. 13.6.1 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration When Replacing Cassette 0007-4923 - 1st Side Adjustment (mechanism) 1) Make a copy using the cassette 1/2, and check to make sure that the front margin is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.
Page 552 Chapter 13 - Adjusting the Cassette 1 9) Tighten the fixing screw. 6) Remove the 2 claws [2], and detach the 10) Put the cassette 1 back into the grip (right front) [1]. machine. 11) Make a copy using the cassette 1 as the source of paper;...
Page 553 Chapter 13 　 source of paper, and check to make sure - ADJ-REFE that the margin in the image front direction - margin adjustment (2nd side; large- is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm. size; A4/LTR or longer in feed direction) 11) Mount the right front cover. 1) Make a double-sided copy (large-size) - margin adjustment (2nd side;...
Page 554: Adjusting The Horizontal Registration When Replacing The Duplex Unit
Chapter 13 13.6.2 Adjusting the 3) Record the new setting on the service label. Horizontal - ADJ-REFE Registration When - ADJ-RE-L Replacing 13.6.3 Adjusting the Duplex Unit 0007-4924 Manual Feed 1) Make double-sided small- and large- Pickup Horizontal size copies, and check to make sure that the front margin is 2.5 +/-2.0 mm.
Page 555: Registering The Paper Width Basic Value
Chapter 13 　 tray. 13.6.4 Registering 4) Loosen the fixing screw [1] on the top the Paper Width cover of the manual feed tray. Basic Value 0007-4926 5) While referring to the index you checked in step 2), move the top cover of 1) Turn on the main power switch.
Page 556 Chapter 13 width. 4) Register the paper width basic value for A6R as follows: 4-1) Match the manual feed side guide against the A6R marking. 4-2) In service mode, select 'register A6R width'. CPOIER>FUNCTION>CST>MF-A6R 4-3) Press the OK key to save the new A6R width.
Page 557: Chapter 14　Correcting Faulty Images
Chapter 14 　Correcting Faulty Images...
Page 558 Contents Contents Chapter 14　Correcting Faulty Images 14.1 Making lnitial Checks.................... 14-1 14.1.1 Site Environment..................... 14-1 14.1.2 Checking the Paper ..................14-1 14.1.3 Checking the Placement of Paper ..............14-1 14.1.4 Checking the Durables ..................14-1 14.1.5 Checking the Periodically Serviced Items ............14-1 14.1.6 Checking the Units and Functional Systems...........
Page 559: Making Lnitial Checks
14.1.2 Checking the Paper 0007-9384 a. Be sure the paper being used is of a type recommended by Canon. b. Be sure that the paper is not moist. Try using paper fresh out of package. 14.1.3 Checking the Placement of Paper 0007-9385 a.
Page 560: Checking The Units And Functional Systems
- Check to make sure that the paper is free of a bent leading edge and is free of curling, waving, and excess moisture. - Try using paper and transparency of a type recommended by Canon to see if the problem is corrected.
Page 561 Chapter 14 - Check to see that the cassette is correctly fitted. Check to see that the paper size is correctly set. Try replacing with a fault-free cassette to see if the problem is corrected. - Check to see that the movement of the holding plate of the cassette is normal and the plate is free of deformation.
Page 562: Others
Chapter 14 　 - Check to see that the user has a correct understanding of how to use the machine and is using it correctly. 14.1.7 Others 0007-9389 If a machine is brought from a cold to warm room, its inside can start to develop condensation, leading to various problems.
Page 563: Troubleshooting
Chapter 14 14.2 Troubleshooting 14.2.1 Image Faults 14.2.1.1 Uneven Density 14.2.1.1.1 Uneven Density in Sub Scanning Direction 0007-7464 <Description> This fault can occur when the machine is left alone for about 10 min to 5 hr without removing a paper jam. <Cause>...
Page 564 Chapter 14 　 <Image Sample> F-14-1 14-6...
Page 565 14.2.1.2.1 White lines appear in sub scanning direction on solid black and halftone images: Dust on top cover of Developing Assembly 0008-3408 [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description As a result of inspection, it was found this symptom occurred because the laser light was intercepted by dust on the top cover of the developing assembly.
Page 566 Chapter 14 　 F-14-2 14-8...
Page 567 14.2.1.2.2 White lines appear in sub scanning direction on solid black and halftone images: Foreign substances adhere to edge of Feeder Guide 0008-3472 [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description As a result of inspection, it was found this symptom occurred because foreign substances on the edge of the feed guide of the developing assembly came into contact with the surface of the drum.
Page 568 Chapter 14 　 F-14-3 14-10...
Page 569 Chapter 14 14.2.1.2.3 Horizontal Line/Blurring at Intervals of 94 to 95 mm 0007-7091 <Cause> The coefficient of friction on the surface of the photosensitive drum where the edge of the cleaning blade remains in contact tends to change, causing uneven rotation and thus blurring.
Page 570 Chapter 14 　 F-14-4 14-12...
Page 571 Chapter 14 14.2.1.2.4 White Lines in Sub Scanning Direction 0007-7465 <Cause> The presence of foreign matter inside the developing assembly can make its way to the developing cylinder, preventing toner from being evenly deposited on the cylinder and, thus causing white lines. <Field Remedy>...
Page 572 Chapter 14 　 <Image Sample> F-14-5 14-14...
Page 573 Chapter 14 <Note> If you remove the right door or the drum unit when replacing the fixing assembly and work with the developing assembly inside the machine, the developing cylinder will remain exposed and become subjected to dust or other foreign matter. For this reason, it is important to remove the developing assembly as well as the drum unit when disassembling and assembling the image formation or fixing system.
Page 574 Chapter 14 　 F-14-6 14-16...
Page 575 Chapter 14 14.2.1.3.2 Soiled Image Leading Edge 0007-7089 <Cause> This problem occurs when paper moves between the photosensitive drum and the transfer roller. When the photopositive surface comes close to or into contact with the toner-coated surface of paper, the toner layer can become shifted toward the trailing edge of the paper. This problem tends to be conspicuous when the toner layer is relatively high against the width of lines (about 0.2 to 0.6 mm) and, in addition, when the lines are at a right angle to the feed direction (axial direction of the photosensitive drum).
Page 576 Chapter 14 　 F-14-7 14-18...
Page 577 Chapter 14 14.2.1.3.3 Black Dots 0007-7093 <Cause> On some types of paper (especially those with a high calcium carbonate content), toner offset to the fixing film can start to cake, moving from the fixing film or the pressure roller to the face or back of paper. <Field Remedy>...
Page 578 Chapter 14 　 F-14-8 14-20...
Page 579 Chapter 14 14.2.1.4 Ghost/Memory 14.2.1.4.1 Ghost 0007-7096 <Cause> This problem tends to occur when there are both residual toner and fresh toner on the developing cylinder and, thus, difference in charge between these two kinds of toner. <Field Remedy> Make several copies of a solid image. <Image Sample>...
Page 580 Chapter 14 　 F-14-9 14-22...
Page 581: Malfunction
Poor connection of ROM/RAM 0008-3477 [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Field Remedy In inspection, reinsertion of the ROM corrected the symptoms. If any of the symptoms mentioned above occurs during installation, reinsert the BOOTROM or the RAM.
Page 582: Outline Of Electrical Components
Chapter 14 　 14.3 Outline of Electrical Components 14.3.1 Clutch/Solenoid 14.3.1.1 Clutches and Solenoids 0007-6833 <Reader Unit> The reader unit does not have a clutch or solenoid. <Printer Unit> T-14-1 Notation Name Description Remarks manual feed pickup clutch drives the manual feed pickup roller registration clutch drives the registration roller...
Page 583: Motor
Chapter 14 F-14-10 14.3.2 Motor 14.3.2.1 Motors 0007-6835 <Reader Unit> T-14-3 Notation Name Description M501 reader motor drives the carriage T-14-4 Reader controller Notation Parts No. Error M501 FH5-1028 J505 E202 14-25...
Page 584 Chapter 14 　 M501 F-14-11 <Printer Unit> T-14-5 Notation Name Description Remarks polygon motor drives the laser scanner main motor drives the major components of the printer unit fixing motor drives the fixing assembly delivery motor 1 drives the delivery roller bottle rotation motor drives the rotation of the bottle cassette 1 pickup motor...
Page 585 Chapter 14 T-14-6 DC controller Notation Parts No. PART-CHK Error scanner unit MTR>1 J316 E110 FM2-0276(iR2270/2270F/2870/ 2870F) FM2-0334(iR3570/3570F/4570/ 4570F) FK2-0385(iR2270/2270F/2870/ MTR>2 J312 E010 2870F) FM2-0362 (iR3570/3570F/4570/4570F) FK2-0367 MTR>3 J311,J319 E014 FK2-0365 MTR>4 J305 FK2-0015 MTR>5 J302A E025 FK2-0377 MTR>6 J307A FK2-0377 MTR>7 J307A...
Page 586 Chapter 14 　 F-14-12 14-28...
Page 587: Fan
Chapter 14 14.3.3 Fan 14.3.3.1 Fans 0007-6836 <Reader Unit> The reader unit does not have a fan. <Printer Unit> T-14-7 Notation Name Description heat discharge fan (front) discharges heat from the fixing unit heat discharge fan (rear) discharges heat from the fixing unit T-14-8 Notation Parts No.
Page 588: Sensor
Chapter 14 　 F-14-13 14.3.4 Sensor 14.3.4.1 Sensors 0007-6837 <Reader Unit> T-14-9 Notation Name Description copyboard cover open/closed detects the state (open/closed) of the PS501 sensor (rear) copyboard cover copyboard cover open/closed detects the state (open/closed) of the PS502 sensor (front) copyboard cover PS503 CIS HP sensor...
Page 589 Chapter 14 Notation Name Description PS506 original sensor 3 detects original size (for all countries) PS507 original sensor 4 detects original size (AB, Inch/AB) PS508 original sensor 5 detects original size (Inch/A) CIS1 reads originals T-14-10 Reader Notation Parts No. Jam/error code controller PCB 1: copyboard cover...
Page 590 Chapter 14 　 PS508 PS507 PS506 PS502 PS501 PS504 PS505 CIS1 PS503 F-14-14 <Printer Unit> T-14-11 Notation Name Description cassette 1 paper sensor detects the presence/absence of cassette 1 cassette 2 paper sensor detects the presence/absence of cassette 2 cassette 1 paper level sensor A detects paper level A in cassette 1 cassette 1 paper level B sensor detects paper level B in cassette 1...
Page 591 Chapter 14 Notation Name Description PS11 cassette 2 retry sensor detects pickup retry in cassettes 2 PS13 fixing outlet sensor detects paper at the fixing outlet PS14 No. 1 delivery sensor detects delivery PS15 No. 1 delivery full sensor detects a delivery full condition PS16 waste toner sensor detects a waste toner full condition...
Page 592 Chapter 14 　 DC controller Notation Parts No. 1: level about 50% or FH7-7312 P019-6 J318 less 1: level about 50 sheets FH7-7312 P019-7 J318 or less FH7-7312 P021-0 0: paper present J307B FM2-2769 J303 FK2-0149 P027-1 1: paper present J313 xx05 PS10...
Page 593 Chapter 14 T-14-13 Notation Parts No. DC controller PCB AC driver PCB TH1,TH2 fixing film unit J304 iR2270/2270F/2870/2870F J202 FM2-0293(100V) FM2-0358(120V) FM2-0359(230V) iR3570/3570F/4570/4570F FM2-1792(100V) FM2-1793(120V) FM2-1794(230V) FM2-2776 J302A 14-35...
Page 594 Chapter 14 　 TH1, TH2 PS13 PS10 PS22 PS18 PS14 PS15 PS11 PS17 PS16 F-14-15 14-36...
Page 595: Switch
Chapter 14 14.3.5 Switch 14.3.5.1 Switches 0007-6838 <Reader Unit> The reader unit does not have a switch. <Printer Unit> T-14-14 Notation Name Description main power switch turns on/off the main power switch door switch checks the right door environment heater switch turns on/off the environment heater (option) T-14-15 Notation...
Page 596: Lamps, Heaters, And Others
Chapter 14 　 F-14-16 14.3.6 Lamps, Heaters, and Others 14.3.6.1 Lamps, Heaters, and Others 0007-6839 <Reader Unit> T-14-16 Notation Name Parts No. Description reader heater (left) prevents condensation on the reading glass reader heater (right) prevents condensation on the copyboard glass LCD1 LCD panel FL2-1092...
Page 597 Chapter 14 LCD1 F-14-17 <Printer Unit> T-14-17 Notation Name Description fixing main heater fixing main heater fixing sub heater fixing sub heater cassette heater prevents absorption of moisture by the paper inside the cassette deck heater prevents absorption of moisture by paper inside the side deck ELCB1 leakage breaker (100V) leakage breaker...
Page 598 Chapter 14 　 Notation Name Description HDD1 hard disk stores programs and image data SVR1 paper width detecting VR detects the width of paper in the manual feeder speaker speaker (fax unit) T-14-18 Notation Parts No. fixing film unit fixing film unit iR2270/2270F/2870/2870F iR3570/3570F/4570/4570F H1,H2...
Page 599: Pcbs
Chapter 14 Notation Parts No. Main controller PCB DC controller PCB FM2-0342 HDD1 H1, H2 ELCB1 SVR1 ELCB2 F-14-18 14.3.7 PCBs 14.3.7.1 PCBs 0007-9880 <Reader Unit> T-14-20 Name Part No. Description reader controller PCB FG3-3765 controls the reader unit/ADF control panel CPU PCB FG6-8938 controls the control panel control pen key PCB...
Page 600 Chapter 14 　 Name Part No. Description controls the activation of the backlight of control panel inverter PCB FG6-8939 the LCD F-14-19 <Printer Unit> T-14-21 Name Parts No. Description cassette 1 size detection PCB FM2-2770 detects the size of cassette 1 cassette 2 size detection PCB FM2-2770 detects the size of cassette 2...
Page 601 Chapter 14 Name Parts No. Description BD PCB scanner unit generates the BD signal FM2-0276(iR2270/ 2270F/2870/2870F) FM2-0334(iR3570/ 3570F/4570/4570F) NCU PCB FM2-2790 controls the line switching operation NCU PCB (2-line) FM2-2796 controls the line switching operation (2-line) fax board PCB FM2-2789 control the fax unit [10] laser driver PCB...
Page 602 Chapter 14 　 Name Parts No. Description [25] fax board PCB (2-line) FM2-2793 controls the 2-line fax unit [26] pseudo-CI PCB (2-line) FM2-2765 generates the pseudo CI signal [11] [10] [26] [24] [25] [20] [19] [22] [13] [21] [12] [23] [15] [17] [16]...
Page 603: Variable Resistors(Vr), Light-Emitting Diodes(Led),And Check Pins By Pcb
Chapter 14 14.3.8 Variable Resistors(VR), Light-Emitting Diodes(LED),and Check Pins by PCB 14.3.8.1 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes, and Check Pins by PCB 0007-6841 Of the variable resistors (VR), light-emitting diodes (LED), and check pins found in the machine, those that are needed when servicing the machine in the field are discussed. - Some LEDs carry current and emit light when they are off;...
Page 604 Chapter 14 　 14.3.8.3 All-Night Power Supply PCB 0007-6843 J693 J691 J692 VR201 J601 F-14-22 T-14-22 Notation Description VR201 for factory use 14-46...
Page 605: Chapter 15　Self Diagnosis
Chapter 15 　Self Diagnosis...
Page 606 Contents Contents Chapter 15　Self Diagnosis 15.1 Error Code Table ....................15-1 15.1.1 Error Code....................... 15-1 15.2 Error Code Details ....................15-5 15.2.1 Error Code Details ..................15-5 15.2.2 E602 in Detaill ....................15-20 15.3 Error Code (SEND) ..................... 15-34 15.3.1 Results of Self-Diagnosis................15-34 15.3.2 Error Codes ....................
Page 607: Error Code Table
Chapter 15 15.1 Error Code Table 15.1.1 Error Code 0008-0942 T-15-1 Code Error name/description E000 fixing overheating E001 fixing assembly overheating E002 fixing assembly low temperature E003 post-standby fixing low temperature E007 fixing film rotation error E010 main motor rotation error E014 fixing motor rotation error E019...
Page 608 Chapter 15 　 Code Error name/description E261 zero-cross signal error E315 image data error E400 feeder communication error E490 wrong DF type E500 finisher communication error E503 finisher internal communication error E505 finisher backup memory error E514 stack delivery/trailing edge assist motor error E519 gear change motor error E530...
Page 609 Chapter 15 Code Error name/description E5F3 saddle alignment error E5F4 saddle rear stapling error E5F5 saddle front stapling error E5F6 saddle butting error E5F8 saddle connector error E5F9 saddle switch error E602 hard disk error E604 image memory error/shortage E609 hard disk error E610 herd disk coding key fault...
Page 610 Chapter 15 　 Code Error name/description E748 controller board and SDRAM size mismatch E805 fan error 15-4...
Page 611: Error Code Details
Chapter 15 15.2 Error Code Details 15.2.1 Error Code Details 0008-1078 T-15-2 Code Cause Remedy E000 The temperature of the fixing assembly is abnormally high. Reset the condition in service mode: 0001 While startup control is under way, the reading of the main thermistor is COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
Page 612 Chapter 15 　 Code Cause Remedy 0002 The reading of the sub thermistor is Reset the condition in service mode: 295 deg C or more continuously for COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 200 msec. Replace the sub thermistor. Replace the DC controller PCB. E002 The rise in temperature of the fixing assembly is faulty.
Page 613 Chapter 15 Code Cause Remedy 0002 During motor rotation, detection is Replace the main motor. Replace the executed every 100 msec; however, DC controller PCB. the drive signal is absent 5 times in sequence. E014 The rotation of the fixing motor is faulty. 0001 Detection is executed every 100 Replace the fixing motor.
Page 614 Chapter 15 　 Code Cause Remedy 0000 The connection detection signal is Replace the developing assembly toner absent continuously for 100 msec. sensor. Connect the connector. Replace the DC controller PCB. E025 The hopper motor or the bottle motor is faulty. 0000 The sub hopper toner sensor Replace the sub hopper toner sensor.
Page 615 Chapter 15 Code Cause Remedy 0004 While output is being generated, the Replace the high-voltage power supply. AD value of the transfer output Replace the controller PCB. current is 205 (DEC) or more for 100 msec 2 times in sequence. (However, after output, it is not detected for 100 msec.) 0005 While output is being generated, the...
Page 616 Chapter 15 　 Code Cause Remedy E191 There is an error in the communication with the high-voltage power supply. Replace the high-voltage power supply. 0000 The data transmission/reception does not end normally 500 msec after the Replace the DC controller PCB. most recent transmission/reception of data ended normally.
Page 617 Chapter 15 Code Cause Remedy 0003 At the end of a job, the 24-V port is Disconnect and then connect the power off. supply harness connector. Replace the power supply. 0004 When a load is being driven, the 24- Disconnect and then connect the power V port is off.
Page 618 Chapter 15 　 Code Cause Remedy 0001 [Cause] An HDD detection error has See the details under 602. occurred. The HDD cannot be detected. The HDD does not become ready. The HDD returns an error. [Detection] while boot ROM is in session BARSAC startup, mounting (usrIde)
Page 619 Chapter 15 Code Cause Remedy 0006 [Cause] A subbootable that matches See the details under 602. the PDL type does not exit in BOOTDEV/BOOT. [Detection] during loading of sub boot in oclibroot [Timing of Detection] once at bootable startup 0007 [Cause] An ICC profile that matches See the details under 602.
Page 620 Chapter 15 　 Code Cause Remedy 0000 The memory size does not match the Increase the memory. model. E609 There is an error on the HDD. 0008 At startup, the HDD fails to reach a Replace the hard disk. Replace the DC specific temperature level within a controller PCB.
Page 621 Chapter 15 Code Cause Remedy 0002 When the main power is turned on, Check the cable. the communication IC (IPC) on the DC controller PCB cannot be initialized. E711 There is an error in the IPC communication. 0001 The occurrence of an error has been Check the cable.
Page 622 Chapter 15 　 Code Cause Remedy 0001 The coin vendor is not connected Check the cable; thereafter, reset the when the power is turned on, condition in service mode: although it was connected before the COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. power was turned off because of an error.
Page 623 Chapter 15 Code Cause Remedy 100A An error that may be critical to the 1. Execute PDL resetting. system (e.g., failed initialization) has 2. Turn on the power once again. occurred. 9004 There is an error in the 1. Turn on the power once main. communication (PAI) with an 2.
Page 624 Chapter 15 　 Code Cause Remedy 0001 There is a DDI-S communication 1. Check the connector used to connect error. the scanner. 2. Check the power supply of the scanner (to see if initialization takes place at startup). 3. Replace the reader controller, scanner board, or main board as necessary.
Page 625 Chapter 15 Code Cause Remedy 0001 The version of the language file on Download a language file of the correct the HDD and that of the bootable do version. not match. 0002 The size of the language file on the Download a language file of the correct HDD is too large.
Page 626: E602 In Detaill
Chapter 15 　 Code Cause Remedy 1001 There is a mismatch between the Check the correct combination between control board and the SDRAM. board and SDRAM. E805 There is a fan error. 0000 While the fan is at rest, the lock Replace the fan.
Page 627 Chapter 15 Description Remedy Suspension of a write operation to the 1. Find the sector for which the write operation has been boot device has been detected. suspended; then, execute recovery operation. <in the case of black-and-white E code> 1-1 The machine will not permit the use of service mode; go through the following: 1-2 Turn off the power.
Page 628 Chapter 15 　 Description Remedy The IC profile does not exist. 1. Start up in safe mode, and execute full formatting using the SST and re-install the system software (System, Language, RUI); then, turn off and then on the main power. 2.
Page 629 Chapter 15 CHK- Partitio Description 11, 21 13, 25 10, 12, TYPE n in 14, 22, question 23, 24 At startup During routine operation Reme- Reme- Reme- Reme- Reme- Reme- DOSDE General file storage area (user settings, logs, PDL spool, image data control info) PDLDE...
Page 630 Chapter 15 　 CHK- Partitio Description 11, 21 13, 25 10, 12, TYPE n in 14, 22, question 23, 24 At startup During routine operation Reme- Reme- Reme- Reme- Reme- Reme- Entire HDD identifie (check on faulty sector recovery) [HDD formatting] T-15-5 CHK- Partition...
Page 631 Chapter 15 CHK- Partition Description Typical item Normal Safe mode + TYPE in question deleted formatting mode + by HD- formatting with CLEAR formatting with SST FSTDEV Image data Entire Possible (4 FSTDEV Possible; storage area collection of partitions, specified (4 however, (e.g., Box) image data...
Page 632 Chapter 15 　 CHK- Partition Description Typical item Normal Safe mode + TYPE in question deleted formatting mode + by HD- formatting with CLEAR formatting with SST FSTPDEV Image data Entire Possible (4 FSTDEV Possible; storage area collection of partitions, specified (4 however, (e.g., Box)
Page 633 Chapter 15 CHK- Partition Description Typical item Normal Safe mode + TYPE in question deleted formatting mode + by HD- formatting with CLEAR formatting with SST PDLDEV PDL-related User Font Possible PDLDEV Possible; file storage IccProfil specified however, area (font, selection of a specific partition registered...
Page 634 Chapter 15 　 CHK- Partition Description Typical item Normal Safe mode + TYPE in question deleted formatting mode + by HD- formatting with CLEAR formatting with SST BOOTDE Firmware System Not possible Not possible Possible; storage area software however, (System, selection of a Language, specific partition...
Page 635 Chapter 15 T-15-6 Description Remedy The ongoing write operation has 1. Set '0' to TYPE-TYPE, and execute HDD- been suspended (at startup). CHECK (50 to 50 min). Thereafter, turn off and then back on the power. 2. If the symptom still exists after the foregoing, type in TYPE-TYPE for the partition in question, and execute HDD-CLEAR.
Page 636 Chapter 15 　 Description Remedy A file system error has occurred. 1. Type in TYPE-TYPE of the partition in question, and execute HDD-CLEAR. Thereafter, turn off and then back on the main switch. 2. If the system still exits after the foregoing, suspect a fault on the HDD, and replace the HDD and re-install the system software.
Page 637 Chapter 15 Description Remedy A file system error has occurred. The system software is designed so that a recovery session will not run for the boot partition unless you use safe mode in combination with the SST. 1. Start up in safe mode, and execute full formatting using the SST and re-install the system software (System, Language, RUI).
Page 638 Chapter 15 　 Description Remedy 13, 25 The ongoing write operation has There is a likelihood of the presence of damage to been suspended. the file data on the HDD (e.g., Box). 1. Set '0' for TYPE-TYPE, and execute HDD- CHECK (40 to 50 min).
Page 639 Chapter 15 Keep in mind that formatting of the HDD in service mode will necessarily be full formatting. - HD-CHECK If the power is cut while data is being written to the HDD, the occurrence of a write- suspended sector is a possibility. When HD-CHECK is run on such a sector, repairs will be made, but all data in the sector will be lost.
Page 640: Error Code (Send)
Chapter 15 　 15.3 Error Code (SEND) 15.3.1 Results of Self-Diagnosis 0008-0278 T-15-7 Cause Remedy There is a shortage of TCP/IP resources. Try again later. While continuous transmission is under way or has Wait a while; then, try again. ended in FTP or Windows (SMB), a shortage of TCP/ IP resources has occurred, not permitting reference.
Page 641 Chapter 15 Cause Remedy Check TCP/IP. The machine's TCP/IP is not in operation. In user mode, check the TCP/IP settings (IP address, DHCP, RARP, BOOTP). The selected server cannot be found. Check the settings. The IP address in question cannot be identified. 1.
Page 642: Error Codes
Chapter 15 　 Cause Remedy The symbol \ is used in the search condition. Remove the symbol \ from the search condition, and try once again. The combination of characters used in the search Check to be sure that the combination of characters is condition fails to make up a correct search condition.
Page 643 Chapter 15 Cause Remedy # 011 The original to be transmitted is not placed properly. Start over from the beginning. # 012 The target is out of recording paper, and transmission Ask the target to supply recording paper. has failed. # 018 There is no response to a redial attempt.
Page 644 Chapter 15 　 Cause Remedy There is a mismatch of F code or password. Check the F code and the password of the target, and start over. # 107 There is a shortage of memory, not permitting 1. Decrease the resolution, and try once again. transmission.
Page 645 Chapter 15 Cause Remedy An address table is being imported from or to the Start over once again. remote UI; or, a different transmission component is being used. # 711 All memory of the Box is used. Delete files from the Box. # 712 The Box is full of files.
Page 646 Chapter 15 　 Cause Remedy The appropriate IP address has not been set up. In user mode, check the TCP/IP settings. When the machine is started up, its IP address is not In user mode, check the TCP/IP settings. assigned by means of DHCP, RARP, or BOOTP. # 756 In system control setup (user mode), 'use NetWare' is In network settings of system control setup (user...
Page 647 Chapter 15 Cause Remedy When an attempt is made to transmit to the file server, Check the address. it has been found that no match exits in the specified directory. You are not authorized for access to the folder. Set the server so that you will be authorized to access the folder.
Page 648 Chapter 15 　 Cause Remedy The data that has been received is of a type that cannot Ask the source to check the settings and transmit it be handled (i.e., BASE64 or Unicode is illegal). once again. # 821 The data that has been received is of a type that cannot Ask the target to check the settings and transmit once be handled (i.e., TIFF interpretation error has again.
Page 649 Chapter 15 Cause Remedy In user mode, the e-mail setting or the network setting 1. In user mode, check the DNS setting, e-mail/i-fax is yet to be made, causing a mail server fault and, thus, setting, and IP address made as part of the network preventing reception of MDN (transmission settings.
Page 650 Chapter 15 　 Cause Remedy In relation to an attempt for transmission of e-mail/i- 1. Set 'SSL' to 'OFF' as part of the network settings fax, a request has been made for the use of a client under the system control settings (user mode). certificate by the mail server.
Page 651: Jam Code
Chapter 15 15.4 Jam Code 15.4.1 Jam Cover (printer unit) 0007-8207 T-15-9 Code 01xx delay jam 02xx stationary jam 0Axx residual jam T-15-10 Code Sensor Sensor notation xx01 cassette 1 tray sensor PS10 xx02 cassette 2 retry sensor PS11 xx03 cassette 3 retry sensor PS1 (cassette pedestall) xx04...
Page 652: Jam Code (Finisher-Related)
Chapter 15 　 15.4.2 Jam Code (finisher-related) 0008-0980 - Finisher-Q3/Q4 T-15-11 Code Sensor notation 1001 inlet path sensor feed delay jam 1002 punch path sensor (punch registration sensor) LED5/PTR5 feed delay jam 1004 delay path sensor feed delay jam 1101 inlet path sensor feed stationary jam 1102 punch path sensor (punch registration sensor)
Page 653: Jam Code (Adf-Related)
Chapter 15 Code Sensor notation 1788 saddle door open jam DOOR - Finisher-S1 T-15-12 Code Sensor notation 1011 inlet path sensor feed delay jam 1121 inlet path sensor feed stationary jam 1F81 stack delivery jam 1506 staple jam 1307 power-on jam POWER ON 1408 door open jam (joint)
Page 654 Chapter 15 　 Code Sensor notation Description 0004 registration sensor After the registration sensor has gone on, it stationary does not go off even when the paper has been moved for 500 mm (700 mm if in extra length mode). 0005 read sensor delay PI2,PI3...
Page 655 Chapter 15 Code Sensor notation Description 0090 ADF open reader unit sensor The ADF has been opened while the machine is in operation (while the drive system is in operation). 0091 user ADF open reader unit sensor The ADF has been opened while the machine is in operation (while the drive system is at rest).
Page 656: Alarm Code
Chapter 15 　 15.5 Alarm Code 15.5.1 Alarm Code 0008-0978 T-15-14 Location code Description 02 scanner system 0002 indication of soiling of glass in stream reading mode 04 pickup/feed system 0008 optional deck lifter error 0011 1st cassette retry alarm 0012 2nd cassette retry alarm 0013...
Page 657: Finisher/Saddle Finisher Error Codes
Chapter 15 15.6 Finisher/Saddle Finisher Error Codes 15.6.1 Error Code in Detail (finisher, puncher) 0008-1518 T-15-15 Code Detail Name Detection Remedy code E500 0001 fault in Replace the finisher communication controller PCB. Replace with the finisher the DC controller PCB. (common among all finishers) E503...
Page 658 Chapter 15 　 Code Detail Name Detection Remedy code E514 0001 When the stack Replace the finisher retaining spacer controller PCB. Replace is returned to the stack delivery motor. home position, Check the stack delivery the belt escape drive mechanism. home position sensor does not go on within 1.5...
Page 659 Chapter 15 Code Detail Name Detection Remedy code E519 0001 The home Replace the finisher position sensor controller PCB. Replace does not go off the gear change motor. even when the Check the gear change gear change mechanism. motor has rotated for a specific Gear change period of time.
Page 660 Chapter 15 　 Code Detail Name Detection Remedy code E530 0001 The home Replace the finisher position sensor controller PCB. Replace does not go off the front alignment motor. even when the Check the front aligning front alignment plate drive mechanism. motor has been Check the front alignment rotated for a...
Page 661 Chapter 15 Code Detail Name Detection Remedy code E531 0001 The home Replace the finisher position sensor controller PCB. Replace does not go off the stapler. Check the even when the harness. stapler motor has rotated for a specific period of Stapler error time.
Page 662 Chapter 15 　 Code Detail Name Detection Remedy code E532 0001 The home Replace the finisher position sensor controller PCB. Replace does not go off the stapler shift motor. even after the Check the stapler shift stapler shift home position sensor. motor has rotated Check the harness.
Page 663 Chapter 15 Code Detail Name Detection Remedy code E535 0001 The home Replace the finisher position sensor controller PCB. Replace does not go off the swing cam motor. even when the Check the swing cam swing motor has home position sensor. rotated for a Check the harness.
Page 664 Chapter 15 　 Code Detail Name Detection Remedy code E537 0001 The home Replace the finisher position sensor controller PCB. Replace does not go on the rear alignment motor. within 2000 Check the rear aligning msec after the plate drive mechanism. start of operation Check the rear alignment when the read...
Page 665 Chapter 15 Code Detail Name Detection Remedy code E540 0002 Replace the No. 1 tray shift motor. Replace the Upper tray finisher controller PCB. ascent/descent Check the tray ascent/ motor clock error descent mechanism. Upper tray ascent/descent 0003 motor error Replace the No.
Page 666 Chapter 15 　 Code Detail Name Detection Remedy code E577 8001 The paddle home Check the paddle motor. position sensor Check the paddle home does not go on position sensor. Replace within 1.5 sec the finisher controller when the paddle PCB.
Page 667 Chapter 15 Code Detail Name Detection Remedy code E590 0001 The punching Check the punch motor. home position is Check the punch motor not detected even clock sensor. Check the when the punch driver PCB. puncher motor Replace the finisher has been driven controller PCB.
Page 668 Chapter 15 　 Code Detail Name Detection Remedy code E592 0003 Power trailing Error in light- Check the paper trailing edge edge sensor/ receiving voltage sensor. Check the horizontal when light is registration sensor registration sensor. Check the emitted punch driver PCB. Replace (horizontal the finisher controller PCB.
Page 669 Chapter 15 Code Detail Name Detection Remedy code E592 0008 Paper trailing edge Error in light- Check the paper trailing edge sensor/registration receiving voltage sensor. Check the horizontal when light is not sensor error registration sensor. Check the emitted punch drive PCB. Replace the (horizontal finisher controller PCB.
Page 670 Chapter 15 　 Code Detail Name Detection Remedy code E5F0 0001 The paper Check the paper positioning plate positioning plate motor. home position Check the paper sensor does to go positioning plate home on when the position sensor. Replace paper positioning the finisher controller motor has been PCB.
Page 671 Chapter 15 Code Detail Name Detection Remedy code E5F1 0001 The number of Check the paper folding detection pulses motor. Check the paper of the paper folding motor clock folding motor sensor. Replace the clock sensor has finisher controller PCB. dropped below a Check the paper folding specific value.
Page 672 Chapter 15 　 Code Detail Name Detection Remedy code E5F2 0001 The guide home Check the guide motor. position sensor Check the guide home does not go on position sensor. Replace when the guide the finisher controller motor has been PCB.
Page 673 Chapter 15 Code Detail Name Detection Remedy code E5F3 0001 The aligning Check the alignment plate home motor. Check the position sensor alignment home position does not go on sensor. Check the aligning when the plate drive mechanism. alignment motor Replace the finisher has been driven controller PCB.
Page 674 Chapter 15 　 Code Detail Name Detection Remedy code E5F4 0001 The stitching Replace the stitcher (rear). home position Check the harness. sensor does not Replace the finisher go on when the controller PCB. stitch motor (rear) has been rotated in reverse for 0.5 sec or more.
Page 675 Chapter 15 Code Detail Name Detection Remedy code E5F5 0001 The stitching Replace the stitcher home position (front). Check the harness. sensor does not Replace the finisher go on when the controller PCB. stitch motor (front) has been rotated in reverse for 0.5 sec or more.
Page 676 Chapter 15 　 Code Detail Name Detection Remedy code E5F6 0001 Saddle butting The paper Check the paper butting error butting plate plate motor. Check the home position paper butting plate home sensor does not position sensor. Replace go on when the the finisher controller paper butting PCB.
Page 677 Chapter 15 Code Detail Name Detection Remedy code E5F6 0003 Saddle butting The number of Check the paper butting error detection pulses plate motor. Check the of the paper paper butting plate motor butting plate clock sensor. Replace the motor has finisher controller PCB.
Page 678 Chapter 15 　 Code Detail Name Detection Remedy code E5F6 0004 Saddle butting The paper Check the paper butting error butting plate plate motor. Check the leading edge paper butting plate leading sensor does not edge sensor. Replace the go off when the finisher controller PCB.
Page 679 Chapter 15 Code Detail Name Detection Remedy code E5F8 0001 The connector of Connect the connector of the paper butting the guide home position plate home sensor. Check the harness. position sensor Replace the finisher has been controller PCB. identified as being disconnected.
Page 680 Chapter 15 　 Code Detail Name Detection Remedy code 0001 Saddle switch The inlet cover Check the inlet cover error switch has been switch. Check the inlet identified as cover sensor. Check the being open for 1 front cover open/closed sensor.
Page 681 Chapter 15 Code Detail Name Detection Remedy code 0002 Saddle switch The front cover Check the front cover error switch has been switch. Check the inlet identified as cover sensor. Check the being open from front cover open/closed the start of sensor.
Page 682 Chapter 15 　 Code Detail Name Detection Remedy code 0003 Saddle switch The delivery Check the delivery cover error cover switch has switch. Check the inlet been identified as cover sensor. Check the being open after inlet cover sensor. Check the start of the front cover open/ printing or the...
Page 683: Dadf Error Codes
Chapter 15 15.7 DADF Error Codes 15.7.1 Error Code in Detail (DF) 0008-1517 T-15-16 Detail Code Description Type Remedy code E400 0001 Disconnect and then connect the connector. Check sum error Replace the reader controller PCB. Replace the ADF controller PCB. 0002 Disconnect and then connect the connector.
Page 684: Chapter 16　Service Mode
Chapter 16 　Service Mode...
Page 685 Contents Contents Chapter 16　Service Mode 16.1 Outline........................16-1 16.1.1 Construction of Service Mode ................ 16-1 16.1.2 Starting Service Mode and Making Selections ..........16-2 16.1.3 Ending Service Mode ..................16-3 16.1.4 Back-Up ......................16-3 16.1.5 Initial Screen ....................16-5 16.1.6 2nd/3rd Item Screen ..................16-5 16.1.7 4th Item Screen ....................
Page 686: Outline
Chapter 16 16.1 Outline 16.1.1 Construction of Service Mode 0007-8133 The machine's service mode has a 3-layer screen construction: Initial screen, Level 1/2 screen, and Level 3 screen. Its mode items are grouped into those used in regular maintenance work (Level 1 items) and those used in response to faults (Level 2 items). User screen ( )(2,8)( ) Reset key...
Page 687: Starting Service Mode And Making Selections
Chapter 16 　 The machine's service mode is divided into the following 7 types: COPIER FEEDER DISPLAY status indication mode SORTER input/output indication mode BOARD ADJUST adjustment mode FUNCTION operation/inspection mode OPTION settings mode TEST test print mode COUNTER counter mode F-16-2 16.1.2 Starting Service Mode and Making Selections 0007-8135...
Page 688: Ending Service Mode
Chapter 16 Copier's service mode COPIER FEEDER ADF's service mode only when installed. SORTER Sorter's or finisher's service mode only if installed; the absence of a mode for a sorter prevents the indication of the notation. BOARD Optional board's service mode only if installed F-16-3 16.1.3 Ending Service Mode...
Page 689: Back-Up
Chapter 16 　 16.1.4 Back-Up 0007-8137 At time of shipment from the factory, all machines are adjusted individually, and adjustment values are recorded in their respective service labels. If you have replaced the reader controller PCB or the DC controller PCB, or if you have initialized the RAM, the adjustment values (for ADJUST and OPTION) will return to their default settings.
Page 690: Initial Screen
Chapter 16 16.1.5 Initial Screen 0007-8138 COPIER Initial item FEEDER Touch to select an item. SORTER BOARD F-16-5 16.1.6 2nd/3rd Item Screen 0007-8139 Display Adjust Function Option Test Counter 2nd item Touch to select VERSION an item. USER ACC-STS ANALOG 3rd item CST-STS Touch to select...
Page 691: 4Th Item Screen
Chapter 16 　 16.1.7 4th Item Screen 0007-8140 Page Display Adjust Function Option Test Counter <VERSION> < 1/3 > < READY > DC-CON Machine States item READY: ready for service/copy JAM: paper jam present PANEL SERVICE: service mode under way WAITING: operation (e.g., initial rotation) under way ANAPRO...
Page 692: Display（Status Display Mode
Chapter 16 16.2 DISPLAY（Status Display Mode） 16.2.1 COPIER 16.2.1.1 Copier List 0007-9077 <VERSION> T-16-1 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION Sub-item Description Level ROM version of each circuit board Marking style<R-CON XX.YY> XX : Version number ,YY : Development control number - <--.-->...
Page 693 Chapter 16 　 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION Sub-item Description Level LANG-JP Version of the Japanese language file JAVA-VM Version of JavaVM in bootable MEAP Version of the MEAP Description on the hard disk OCR-CN Version of the simple-font Chinese OCR OCR-JP Version of the Japanese OCR OCR-KR...
Page 694 Chapter 16 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION Sub-item Description Level LANG-RM Version of the Rumanian language file LANG-SK Version of the Slovak language file LANG-TK Version of the Turkish language file <ACC-STS> T-16-2 COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS Sub-item Description Level FEEDER DADF connection status...
Page 695 Chapter 16 　 COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS Sub-item Description Level NETWARE Netware firmware installation status 0: Not installed 1: Installed SEND Send function addition status 0: Send function not added 1: Send function added PDL-FNC1/2 Valid PDL 0000 0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111 1111 (0:OFF,1:ON) b31 to b16 for PDL-FNC1 b15 to b0 for PDL-FNC2 b31: BDL, b30: PS, b29: PCL, b28: PDF, b27: LIPS, b26: N201, b25: I5577,...
Page 696 Chapter 16 <CST-STS> T-16-4 COPIER > DISPLAY > CST-STS Sub-item Description Level WIDTH-MF Paper width on the manual feedtray Unit: mm <JAM> F-16-9 16-11...
Page 697 Chapter 16 　 Touch an arbitrary jam display screen to see details about the jam. (1) To previous page (2) To next page (3) Jam sequential number (4) Jam type (5) Corresponding sensor (6) To next jam screen (7) To previous jam screen <No.>...
Page 698 Chapter 16 <ERR> F-16-10 <No.> Error sequential number: 1 to 50 (The oldest error has the greatest number.) <DATE> Error occurrence date <TIME1> Error occurrence time <TIME2> Error reset time <CODE> Error code <DTL> Error detail code (0000 for none) <1>...
Page 699 Chapter 16 　 COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS Sub-item Description Leve TR-V Voltage at transfer charging roller Registrationance detection control (ATVC) Unit: V <CCD> T-16-6 COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD Sub-item Description Level TARGET-R Red shooting target value OFST CCD offset level adjustment value GAIN CCD gain level adjustment value MFIL...
Page 700 Chapter 16 <ALARM-2> F-16-11 <No.> Alarm sequential number: 1 to 50 (The oldest alarm has the greatest number.) <DATE> Alarm occurrence date <TIME1> Alarm occurrence time <TIME2> Alarm reset time <CODE> Alarm location code and alarm code <DTL> Alarm detail code <CNTR>...
Page 701 Chapter 16 　 T-16-8 Item Description Error sequential number: (The oldest error has the greatest number.) DATE Data acquisition date TIME Data acquisition time D+deg C In-machine temperature In-machine humidity F+deg C Fixing roller surface temperature 16-16...
Page 702: Feeder
Chapter 16 16.2.2 FEEDER 16.2.2.1 Feeder List 0007-9922 FEEDER >DISPLAY T-16-9 FEEDER >DISPLAY Sub-item Description Level FEEDSIZE Document size detected by the feeder TRY-WIDE Distance between document width detection slides (Paper width detection [mm]) 16-17...
Page 703: I/O （I/O Display Mode
Chapter 16 　 16.3 I/O （I/O Display Mode） 16.3.1 Outline 0008-0893 The figures below show the COPIER>I/O screen and the next pages describe the items (necessary items for market services only). Display Adjust Function Option Test Counter DC-CON R-CON FEEDER SORTER MN-CONT F-16-13...
Page 704: Dc-Con
Chapter 16 Display Adjust Function Option Test Counter < 1/3 > < READY > <DC-CON> P001 xxxxxxxx P002 xxxxxxxx P003 xxxxxxxx P004 xxxxxxxx P005 xxxxxxxx P006 xxxxxxxx P007 xxxxxxxx P008 xxxxxxxx F-16-14 16.3.2 <DC-CON> 0008-1403 T-16-10 Address Display contents Remarks P001 For development Fixing motor FG output signal...
Page 705 Chapter 16 　 P003 For development 8-15 Not used P004 For development 8-15 Not used P005 Not used High-voltage board high voltage reset request 0:High voltage reset request For development 8-15 Not used P006 Cassette 1 feed motor current switching 0 Cassette 1 feed motor current switching 1 Cassette 1 feed motor current switching 2 Cassette 1 feed motor current switching 3...
Page 706 Chapter 16 P014 Not used P015 Not used P016 Not used P017 For development P018 For development P019 Manual feed clutch 1:ON Registration clutch 1:ON Sleeve clutch 1:ON Duplex transport clutch 1:ON (iR2270/2270F/2870/2870F model only) Cassette 2 retry sensor 1:Detected Cassette 2 paper sensor 1:No paper Cassette 2 paper level A sensor...
Page 707 Chapter 16 　 P023 Duplex motor current switching 10 Duplex motor current switching 11 Heat exhaust fan R 1:ON For development Waste toner sensor 0:Full For development Pre-exposure switching 1:Pre-exposure with small quantity of light For development P024 For development P025 For development Pickup 1 solenoid...
Page 708: R-Con
Chapter 16 P029 First paper ejection sensor 1:Detected First paper ejection full sensor 0:Full Fused paper ejection sensor 1:Detected Front door sensor 0:OPEN For development P030 For development Paper feed door sensor 0:OPEN Hopper level sensor 0:No toner Cassette 1 retry sensor 1:Detected For development P031...
Page 709 Chapter 16 　 Address Address Remarks 24V power supply monitor signal 0:Normal Optical motor drive signal 1: Forward 0: Reverse For development For development 13V power supply monitor signal 0:Normal Not used For development P003 For development For development For development For development LED control signal 1:ON　...
Page 710 Chapter 16 Address Address Remarks For development For development ADF sensor interrupt input 0:In operation Platen sensor interrupt input 0 1:Platen closed HP sensor interrupt input 1:HP Platen sensor interrupt input 1 1:Platen closed P007 For development For development For development For development Optical motor driver power saving 0:active...
Page 711: Feeder
Chapter 16 　 16.3.4 <FEEDER> 0008-1275 T-16-12 Address Display contents Remarks P001 Read sensor 1:Detected Pre-registration sensor 1:Detected P002 Stamp solenoid 1:ON Clutch 1:ON Document load LED 1:ON P003 P004 Document detection sensor 1:Document present Cover sensor 1:Closed For development For development For development P005...
Page 712: Sorter
Chapter 16 Address Display contents Remarks Paper ejection sensor 1:Paper present P006 For development P007 P008 P009 P010 For development P011 For development 16.3.5 <SORTER> 0008-1276 T-16-13 Address Controller Display contents Remarks P001 STACKER Entry transport motor A Entry transport motor B Entry transport motor A- 　...
Page 713 Chapter 16 　 Address Controller Display contents Remarks Punch transport motor current switching 1 1:ON　 Tray 2 motor clock Tray 1 motor clock P003 STACKER For development For development For development For development Not used Not used Not used Not used P004 STACKER Saddle connection detection signal...
Page 714 Chapter 16 Address Controller Display contents Remarks Not used Punch motor standby 1:ON　 Entry sensor(IRQ0) 1:ON　 Paper rear end sensor(IRQ1) 1:ON　 Punch communication input(IRQ2) 0:ON Not used P007 STACKER Tray proximity sensor 0:ON Tray 2 area sensor 1 0:ON Tray 2 area sensor 2 0:ON Tray 2 area sensor 3 0:ON...
Page 715 Chapter 16 　 Address Controller Display contents Remarks Tray 2 shift motor power switching 1 0:ON P010 STACKER Not used Oscillating pressure motor power switching 0 0:ON Oscillating pressure motor phase-A pulse output Oscillating pressure motor phase-B pulse output Not used Not used Not used Not used...
Page 716 Chapter 16 Address Controller Display contents Remarks Processing tray paper detection sensor 1:ON　 Rear-end assist HP sensor 1:ON　 Not used Not used Not used P014 STACKER Post-alignment motor phase A Post-alignment motor phase B Post-alignment motor current switching 0 0:ON Not used Not used Not used...
Page 717 Chapter 16 　 Address Controller Display contents Remarks Not used 　 Not used 　 P017 STACKER Stapler slide standby 1:ON Stapler CW 1:ON Stapler CCW 1:ON Not used Stapler slide phase A Stapler slide phase B Not used Not used P018 STACKER Not used...
Page 718 Chapter 16 Address Controller Display contents Remarks Bundle-out motor phase B- Ejection-position paper detection sensor 1:ON Scalable interlock 1:ON Shutter HP sensor 1:ON Oscillating guide interlock 1:ON P021 STACKER DIPSW_8 0:ON DIPSW_7 0:ON DIPSW_6 0:ON DIPSW_5 0:ON DIPSW_4 0:ON DIPSW_3 0:ON DIPSW_2 0:ON...
Page 719 Chapter 16 　 Address Controller Display contents Remarks P024 SADDLE Guide motor phase A Guide motor phase B Guide motor current switching 0:ON Saddle transport motor current switching Saddle transport motor phase A Saddle transport motor phase B Saddle transport motor phase A- Saddle transport motor phase B- P025 SADDLE...
Page 720 Chapter 16 Address Controller Display contents Remarks Folding roller guide HP connector open 0:ON Saddle stapler unit connector open 0:ON Butting plate TOP connector open 0:ON P028 SADDLE Inside staple detection 1:ON Front staple detection 1:ON Front stapler motor reverse rotation signal 0:ON Transport motor driver standby signal 0:ON...
Page 721 Chapter 16 　 T-16-15 Address Controller Display contents Remarks P031 SADDLE Saddle tray paper detection sensor 0:ON Paper positioning section paper detection 0:ON sensor Crescent roller HP sensor 0:ON Saddle paper ejection path sensor 0:ON Saddle path (upstream) sensor 1:ON Saddle path (midstream) sensor 1:ON Saddle path (downstream) sensor...
Page 722 Chapter 16 Address Controller Display contents Remarks Inside stapler motor reverse rotation 0:ON Front stapler motor forward rotation 0:ON Not used Folding roller HP connector open 0:ON Not used Not used Not used P035 SADDLE DIPSW_1 0:ON DIPSW_2 0:ON DIPSW_3 0:ON DIPSW_4 0:ON...
Page 723 Chapter 16 　 Address Controller Display contents Remarks TRAY_MTR_B 0:ON TRAY_MTR_A 0:ON P038 PUNCHER DIPSW1 0:ON DIPSW2 0:ON DIPSW3 0:ON PCH-OUT Rear-end sensor 1:ON Punch encoder clock Punch HP sensor 0:ON P039 PUNCHER For development For development For development P040 PUNCHER For development For development...
Page 724 Chapter 16 Address Controller Display contents Remarks DIPSW4 0:ON Horizontal registration motor CUR 0:ON For development P042 PUNCHER LED1 0:ON For development For development LED2 0:ON Front cover sensor 0:ON For development PUSHSW2 0:ON PUSHSW1 0:ON P043 PUNCHER Top cover sensor 0:ON 16-39...
Page 725: Adjust（Adjustment Mode
Chapter 16 　 16.4 ADJUST（Adjustment Mode） 16.4.1 COPIER 16.4.1.1 Copier List 0007-9190 <AE> T-16-16 COPIER > ADJUST > AE Sub-item Description Level AE-TBL Adjusting the character density at image density adjustment <Setting range> 1 to 9 (Default: 5) Setting a greater value makes characters darker. Setting a smaller value makes characters lighter.
Page 726 Chapter 16 COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY Sub-item Description Level ADJ-Y Adjusting the CCD read start cell position (image read start position in the main scan direction) <Setting range> 85 to 169 (Default: 144) Increasing the value by 1 shifts the image read start position 0.1 mm outward. ADJ-S Adjusting the optical shading measuring position <Setting range>...
Page 727 Chapter 16 　 Decrease the setting (so that the read start position moves toward the rear). Read start position Increase the setting (so that the read start position moves Original toward the front). F-16-16 <CCD> T-16-18 COPIER > ADJUST > CCD Sub-item Description Level...
Page 728 Chapter 16 COPIER > ADJUST > CCD Sub-item Description Level DFTAR2-R Entering a shading target value (red) when DF is in use (Secondary document read position) <Setting range> 1 to 2047 (Default: 1138) If an image error (attributable to a dirty chart or other) has occurred after the execution of COPIER>FUNCTION>DF-WLVL2, enter factory measurement data in this mode.
Page 729 Chapter 16 　 <DEVELOP> T-16-20 COPIER > ADJUST > DEVELOP Sub-item Description Level DE-OFST Entering an offset value for the developing bias DC <Setting range> -128 to 127 (Default: 0) Setting a greater value increases the density. <DENS> T-16-21 COPIER > ADJUST > DENS Sub-item Description Level...
Page 730 Chapter 16 COPIER > ADJUST > BLANK Sub-item Description Level BLANK-B Entering an adjustment value for the chipping width at the rear of an image <Setting range> -128 to 127 (Default: 0) Setting a greater value increases the chipping width. If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself has been replaced, enter the value from the service label.
Page 731 Chapter 16 　 <HV-TR> T-16-24 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR Sub-item Description Level TR-OFST Entering an output adjustment value for transfer charge current offset <Setting range> -128 to 127 (Default: 0) If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself has been replaced, enter the value from the service label.
Page 732 Chapter 16 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR Sub-item Description Level TR-ENV1 to Setting environment at ATVC setting TR-ENV8 <Setting range> 1 to 3 1: Category A (low temperature) (Default), 2: Category B (room temperature), 3: Category C (high temperature) TR-DUP1 to Setting simplex paper feed mode at ATVC setting TR-DUP8 <Setting range>　1to 4...
Page 733 Chapter 16 　 COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ Sub-item Description Level LOOPREFE Adjusting the registration loop amount at duplex paper feed <Setting range> -128 to 127 (Default: 45) If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself has been replaced, enter the value from the service label.
Page 734 Chapter 16 COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ Sub-item Description Level MF-A6R Entering the basic paper width of the manual feed tray (A6R) <Setting range> 0 to 1024 (Default: 175) If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself has been replaced, enter the value from the service label.
Page 735 Chapter 16 　 COPIER > ADJUST > FIXING Sub-item Description Level FX-FL-LW Entering a fine adjustment value for the fixing film speed when low-speed plain paper is used. Make a fine adjustment of the target control speed for the fixing film speed when low-speed plain paper is used.
Page 736 Chapter 16 COPIER > ADJUST > MISC Sub-item Description Level DK-ADJ-Y Entering a horizontal registration adjustment value for the side paper deck Enter a laser write start position for paper fed from the side paper deck according to the registered numeric value. <Setting range>...
Page 737: Feeder
Chapter 16 　 16.4.2 FEEDER 16.4.2.1 FEEDER List 0007-9921 FEEDER >ADJUST T-16-29 FEEDER >ADJUST Sub-item Description Level DOCST Adjusting the front position of document image <Adjustment method> Setting a greater value delays the image front timing. <Setting range> -50 to 50 (Value at shipping: Factory adjustment value / Value after RAM clearance: 0) LA-SPEED...
Page 738: Sorter
Chapter 16 16.4.3 SORTER 16.4.3.1 Sorter List 0007-9953 SORTER > ADJUST T-16-30 SORTER > ADJUST Sub-item Description Level PNCH-HLE Adjusting the distance from the paper end to the punched hole position <Setting range> -4 to 2 (Value at shipping / Value after RAM clearance: 0) 16-53...
Page 739: Function （Operation/Inspection Mode
Chapter 16 　 16.5 FUNCTION （Operation/Inspection Mode） 16.5.1 COPIER 16.5.1.1 Copier List 0007-9317 <INSTALL> T-16-31 COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL Sub-item Description Level TONER-S Stirring toner in the developer at installation <Operating procedure> 1. Select an item to reverse its display. 2.
Page 740 Chapter 16 COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL Sub-item Description Level E-RDS Setting whether or not to use Embedded RDS <Setting range> 0: Do not use E-RDS (Default) 1: Use E-RDS (Sending all counter information) RGW- Specifying the port number of the dealer server for use by Embedded RDS PORT <Setting range>...
Page 741 Chapter 16 　 <CCD> T-16-32 COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD Sub-item Description Level CCD-ADJ Automatically adjusting CCD <Operating procedure> 1) Place about 10 or more sheets of standard white paper (whitest paper used by the user, excluding color print paper) on the document table. 2) Select <CCD-ADJ>...
Page 742 Chapter 16 <DENS> T-16-33 COPIER > FUNCTION > DENS Sub-item Description Level WHITE- Automatically correcting the white level <Operating procedure> 1) Place about 10 or more sheets of standard white paper (the user's usual paper) on the document table. 2) Select <WHITE-ME> to reverse the display. Then press the OK key. 3) The document lighting lamp scans once and the operation terminates.
Page 743 Chapter 16 　 <DPC> T-16-34 COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC Sub-item Description Level D-GAMMA Controlling photoconductor drum resistance measurement (APVC) Note: Execute this mode only in the following cases and skip it when unnecessary. - Adjustment if the drum unit has been replaced - Fault isolation if automatic copy density adjustment (PD-ME) has ended abnormally - Reference for checking the drum endurance...
Page 744 Chapter 16 <FIXING> T-16-36 COPIER > FUNCTION > FIXING Sub-item Description Level NIP-CHK Making output for measuring the fixing nip width automatically <Operating procedure> 1) Register Plain Paper or Recycled Paper for the manual feed tray. (User mode: Setting Common Specifications>Registering Paper Type). 2) Place plain paper or recycled paper of the A4 (LTR) size on the manual feed tray.
Page 745 Chapter 16 　 COPIER > FUNCTION > PANEL Sub-item Description Level LED-CHK Checking LED lighting in the operating section <Operating procedure> 1) Select this item and press the OK key to start operation. The LED lamps light sequentially. 2) Press LED-OFF to terminate the operation. LED-OFF Checking LED lighting in the operating section <Operating procedure>...
Page 746 Chapter 16 Screen Display Clear CLEAR Help Counter Check BILL <PART-CHK> T-16-39 COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK Sub-item Description Level Specifying a clutch to check its operation (Range: 1 to 6) <Operating procedure> 1) Select this item. 2) Enter the code of the clutch from the ten-key pad. 3) Press the OK key.
Page 747 Chapter 16 　 COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK Sub-item Description Level MTR-ON Starting the motor operation check <Operating procedure> 1) Select this item and press the OK key to repeat ON and OFF in the following pattern: 20-second ON -> OFF Specifying a solenoid to check its operation (Range: 1 to 9) <Operating procedure>...
Page 748 Chapter 16 Fixing motor (M3) Cassette 4 paper feed motor (cassette pedestal) (M2) First paper ejection motor (M4) Deck paper feed motor (deck) (M1) Bottle rotation motor (M5) Deck lifter motor (deck) (M2) Cassette 1 paper feed motor (M6) Second paper ejection motor (2/3 paper ejection) (M1) Cassette 2 paper feed motor (M7) Third paper ejection motor (2/3 paper ejection)
Page 749 Chapter 16 　 COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR Sub-item Description Level DC-CON Clearing RAM on the DC controller circuit board The RAM is cleared when the main power switch is turned OFF and ON. <Operating procedure> 1) Select COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>P-PRINT to print out the contents of the service mode.
Page 750 Chapter 16 COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR Sub-item Description Level CNT-MCON Clearing the service counter incremented by the main controller circuit board The password is cleared when the OK key is pressed. <Operating procedure> 1) Select this item and press the OK key. CNT-DCON Clearing a service counter incremented by the DC controller circuit board The password is cleared when the OK key is pressed.
Page 751 Chapter 16 　 COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR Sub-item Description Level CARD Clearing the card ID (department) related data The card ID related data is cleared when the main power switch is turned OFF and ON. <Operating procedure> 1) Select this item and press the OK key. 2) Turn the main power switch OFF and ON.
Page 752 Chapter 16 <MISC-R> T-16-44 COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R Sub-item Description Level SCANLAMP Lighting the LED lamp (for document lighting) <Operating procedure> 1) Select this item. 2) Press the OK key. The LED lamp (for document lighting) is lit for three seconds.
Page 753 Chapter 16 　 COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P Sub-item Description Level PRE-EXP Checking the pre-exposure lamp (LED) <Operating procedure> 1) Press this item to reverse its display. 2) Press the OK key. After executing each operation for several seconds, the machine stops automatically.
Page 754 Chapter 16 <SYSTEM> T-16-46 COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM Sub-item Description Level DOWNLOA Switching to Download mode <Operating procedure> 1) Select this item. 2) Press the OK button to enter Download mode. CHK-TYPE Specifying a partition number for executing HD-CHK <Operating procedure>...
Page 755: Feeder
Chapter 16 　 16.5.2 FEEDER 16.5.2.1 Feeder List 0007-9924 FEEDER >FUNCTION T-16-47 FEEDER >FUNCTION Sub-item Description Level MTR-CHK Checking the ADF motor and other individually <Operating procedure> 1) Press MTR-CHK to reverse its display. 2) Enter a part corresponding number from the ten-key pad. 3) Press the OK key.
Page 756 Chapter 16 FEEDER >FUNCTION Sub-item Description Level FEED- Checking ADF paper feed operation <Operating procedure> 1) Press FEED-CHK to reverse its display. 2) Enter a part corresponding number from the ten-key pad. 3) Press the OK key. 4) Press FEED-ON to check ADF paper feed operation. Paper feed mode 0: Simplex feed 1: Duplex feed...
Page 757 Chapter 16 　 FEEDER >FUNCTION Sub-item Description Level SL-ON Starting solenoid operation <Operating procedure> Operation specifications shall differ depending on the model. 1) Press SL to reverse its display. Then press the OK key to start solenoid operation. 2) Press the OK key again to stop the operation. (The operation stops automatically in five seconds but the status changes to STOP only when the OK key is pressed again.) MTR-ON...
Page 758: Option （Machine Settings Mode
Chapter 16 16.6 OPTION （Machine Settings Mode） 16.6.1 COPIER 16.6.1.1 Copier List 0007-9547 <BODY> T-16-48 COPIER > OPTION > BODY Sub-item Description Level MODEL-SZ Switching regular resized display and ADF document size detection <Setting range> 0: AB (6R5E) [Default] 1: INCH (5R4E) 2: A (3R3E) 3: AB/INCH (6R5E) FIX-TEMP...
Page 759 Chapter 16 　 COPIER > OPTION > BODY Sub-item Description Level TEMP-CON Switching thick-paper fixing temperature mode <Setting range> 0: OFF [Default] 1: Priority to productivity, control temperature fixed at -10deg C 2: Control temperature fixed at -6deg C 3: Control temperature fixed at -3deg C 4: Priority to fixing, control temperature fixed at +3deg C 5: Control temperature fixed at +6deg C 6: Control temperature fixed at +10deg C...
Page 760 Chapter 16 COPIER > OPTION > BODY Sub-item Description Level CONFIG Selecting several types of firmware installed on the hard disk and switching the country, language, and paper size type of this machine <Adjustment method> XXYYZZAAXX: Country (UP), YY: Language (ja), ZZ(00) Destination, AA(00): Paper size type The display contents conform to the display method of (COPIER>DISPLAY>USER>LANGUAGE).
Page 761 Chapter 16 　 COPIER > OPTION > BODY Sub-item Description Level CCD-LUT Setting whether or not to use LUT for gain correction 0: Do not use (Default) 1: Use (One-point correction) 2: Do not use (Three-point correction) ENVP-INT Setting the in-machine temperature & humidity and fixing temperature log acquisition cycle Select COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>ENV-PRT and COPIER>DISPLAY>ENVRNT to set the log acquisition cycles.
Page 762 Chapter 16 COPIER > OPTION > BODY Sub-item Description Level CPMKP-SW Turning ON and OFF the sequence of reducing the copy speed to maintain the fixing performance for copy images <Setting range> 0: OFF, 1: ON HUM-SW Changing the charge output setting by humidity sensor <Setting range>...
Page 763 Chapter 16 　 COPIER > OPTION > BODY Sub-item Description Level COTDPC-D Saving the toner (Potential (VD) low) <Setting range> 0: No saving [Default] 1: Down about 10% 2: Down about 20% 3: Down about 30% RMT-LANG Changing the remote UI language from web <Adjustment method>...
Page 764 Chapter 16 COPIER > OPTION > BODY Sub-item Description Level SMTPRXPN Changing the SMTP send port number <Setting range> 0 to 65535 (units of 1) [Default: 25] POP3PN Changing the POP receive port number <Setting range> 0 to 65535 (units of 1) [Default: 110] RUI-DSP Setting whether to display a copy screen for RUI (Option switch conforming to the Disability Law)
Page 765 Chapter 16 　 COPIER > OPTION > BODY Sub-item Description Level ORG-LTR Setting a special paper size that cannot be recognized by DF This is targeted at LTR notified of by DF. <Setting range> 0: LTR [Default] 1:G-LTR 2:A-LTR 3:EXECTIVE 4:LTR ORG-LTRR Setting a special paper size that cannot be recognized by DF...
Page 766 Chapter 16 COPIER > OPTION > BODY Sub-item Description Level UI-BOX Setting whether or not to display the box screen of the operating section <Setting range> 0: Do not display 1: Display [Default] UI-SEND Setting whether or not to display the send screen of the operating section <Setting range>...
Page 767 Chapter 16 　 COPIER > OPTION > BODY Sub-item Description Level CMD-PORT Turning the TOT asynchronous status communication port ON or OFF The port for asynchronous status communication in TUIF over TCP/IP is turned ON or OFF. <Setting range> 0: OFF [Default] 1: ON NS-CMD5 Limiting the use of CRAM-MD5 in SMTP authentication...
Page 768 Chapter 16 COPIER > OPTION > BODY Sub-item Description Level NS-LGN Limiting the use of LOGIN for SMTP authentication This is set to limit the use of LOGIN for SMTP authentication in an environment where communication packets are encrypted <Setting range> 0: Dependent on the SMTP server [Default] 1: Do not use MEAP-PN...
Page 769 Chapter 16 　 COPIER > OPTION > BODY Sub-item Description Level DA-PORT Turning the TOT asynchronous status communication port ON or OFF <Setting range> 0: CLOSE [Default] 1: OPEN (when DA is attached) DA-CNCT Setting DA connection <Setting range> 0: OFF [Default] 1: ON CHNG-STS Setting the TOT status connection port number...
Page 770 Chapter 16 <USER> T-16-49 COPIER > OPTION >USER Sub-item Description Level COPY-LIM Changing the upper limit of copy count <Setting range> 1 to 9999 [Default: 999] SLEEP Turning the sleep function ON or OFF <Setting range> 0: OFF 1: ON [Default] The sleep function is set with Timer in User Mode.
Page 771 Chapter 16 　 COPIER > OPTION >USER Sub-item Description Level PR-PSESW Setting whether or not to display the print pause function switch <Setting range> 0: No print pause function [Default] The user screen does not display the print pause function. (Conventional specification) 1: Print pause function [Default] The user screen does not display the print output stop and restart settings.
Page 772 Chapter 16 COPIER > OPTION >USER Sub-item Description Level DOC-REM Setting whether or not to display the document removal message <Setting range> 0: Do not display [Default 1] 1: Display SIZE-DET Turning the document size detection function ON or OFF <Setting range>...
Page 773 Chapter 16 　 COPIER > OPTION >USER Sub-item Description Level PH-D-SEL Setting the number of lines for printing in Photo mode <Setting range> 0: 141 lines [Default] 1: 134 lines OP-SZ-DT Turning document size detection in Book mode ON or OFF Copying with the platen open is switched to the manual document size input mode (conventional) or the automatic document size detection mode.
Page 774 Chapter 16 COPIER > OPTION >USER Sub-item Description Level LGSW-DSP Setting whether or not to display [Log display ON/OFF] on the User mode screen [Default] 0: Do not display [Log display ON/OFF] [Default] 1: Display [Log display ON/OFF] PCL-COPY Supporting the PCL command [COPIES Meru/Pinatubo/Hood] <Setting range>...
Page 775 Chapter 16 　 COPIER > OPTION >USER Sub-item Description Level FREG-SW Setting whether or not to display the free section of the MEAP counter (SEND) <Setting range> 0: Do not display [Default] 1: Display MEAPSAFE Turning the MEAP Safe mode ON or OFF <Setting range>...
Page 776 Chapter 16 COPIER > OPTION >USER Sub-item Description Level PS-MODE Setting PS internal mode <Setting range> 0 to 65535 0: Not compatible [Default] 1: PS Type 3 Halftone command compatible (conventional) (Dither growth forward and reverse) 2 to 65535: Reserved Software counter specifications 100 - 199: Total 200 - 299: Copy (001 to 099 added in case of shortage)
Page 777 Chapter 16 　 T-16-50 Counter Description Support Total 1 Total 2 Total (Large) Total (Small) Total (Full-color 1) Total (Full-color 2) Total (Black-and-white 1) Total (Black-and-white 2) Total (Monochrome / Large) Total (Monochrome / Small) Total (Black-and-white / Large) Total (Black-and-white / Small) Total 1 (Duplex) Total 2 (Duplex) Large (Duplex)
Page 778 Chapter 16 Counter Description Support Total A (Full-color 1) Total A (Full-color 2) Total A (Black-and-white 1) Total A (Black-and-white 2) Total A (Monochrome / Large) Total A (Monochrome / Small) Total A (Black-and-white / Large) Total A (Black-and-white / Small) Total A1 (Duplex) Total A2 (Duplex) Large A (Duplex)
Page 779 Chapter 16 　 Counter Description Support Total B (Monochrome / Small) Total B (Black-and-white / Large) Total B (Black-and-white / Small) Total B1 (Duplex) Total B2 (Duplex) Large B (Duplex) Small B (Duplex) Total B (Monochrome 1) Total B (Monochrome 2) Total B (Full-color / Large) Total B (Full-color / Small) Total B (Full-color + Monochrome / Large)
Page 780 Chapter 16 Counter Description Support Remote copy (Large) Remote copy (Small) Copy (Full-color 1) Copy (Full-color 2) Copy (Monochrome 1) Copy (Monochrome 2) Copy (Black-and-white 1) Copy (Black-and-white 2) Copy (Full-color / Large) Copy (Full-color / Small) Copy (Monochrome / Large) Copy (Monochrome / Small) Copy (Black-and-white / Large) Copy (Black-and-white / Small)
Page 781 Chapter 16 　 Counter Description Support Copy A (Black-and-white 2) Copy A (Full-color / Large) Copy A (Full-color / Small) Copy A (Monochrome / Large) Copy A (Monochrome / Small) Copy A (Black-and-white / Large) Copy A (Black-and-white / Small) Copy A (Full-color + Monochrome / Large) Copy A (Full-color + Monochrome / Small) Copy A (Full-color + Monochrome / 2)
Page 782 Chapter 16 Counter Description Support Local copy (Full-color + Monochrome / Large) Local copy (Full-color + Monochrome / Small) Local copy (Full-color + Monochrome / 2) Local copy (Full-color + Monochrome / 1) Local copy (Full-color / Large / Duplex) Local copy (Full-color / Small / Duplex) Local copy (Monochrome / Large / Duplex) Local copy (Monochrome / Small / Duplex)
Page 783 Chapter 16 　 Counter Description Support Remote copy (Monochrome / Small / Duplex) Remote copy (Black-and-white / Large / Duplex) Remote copy (Black-and-white / Small / Duplex) Print (Total 1) Print (Total 2) Print (Large) Print (Small) Print A (Total 1) Print A (Total 2) Print A (Large) Print A (Small)
Page 784 Chapter 16 Counter Description Support Print (Monochrome / Large / Duplex) Print (Monochrome / Small / Duplex) Print (Black-and-white / Large / Duplex) Print (Black-and-white / Small / Duplex) PDL print (Total 1) PDL print (Total 2) PDL print (Large) PDL print (Small) PDL print (Full-color 1) PDL print (Full-color 2)
Page 785 Chapter 16 　 Counter Description Support Copy + Print (Full-color + Monochrome / 1) Copy + Print (Large) Copy + Print (Small) Copy + Print (2) Copy + Print (1) Copy + Print (Monochrome / Large) Copy + Print (Monochrome / Small) Copy + Print (Full-color / Large / Duplex) Copy + Print (Full-color / Small / Duplex) Copy + Print (Monochrome / Large / Duplex)
Page 786 Chapter 16 Counter Description Support Box print (Full-color 1) Box print (Full-color 2) Box print (Monochrome 1) Box print (Monochrome 2) Box print (Black-and-white 1) Box print (Black-and-white 2) Box print (Full-color / Large) Box print (Full-color / Small) Box print (Monochrome / Large) Box print (Monochrome / Small) Box print (Black-and-white / Large) Box print (Black-and-white / Small)
Page 787 Chapter 16 　 Counter Description Support Receive print (Gray-scale 2) Receive print (Monochrome 1) Receive print (Monochrome 2) Receive print (Full-color / Large) Receive print (Full-color / Small) Receive print (Gray-scale / Large) Receive print (Gray-scale / Small) Receive print (Monochrome / Large) Receive print (Monochrome / Small) Receive print (Full-color + Gray-scale / Large) Receive print (Full-color + Gray-scale / Small)
Page 788 Chapter 16 Counter Description Support Report print (Full-color / Large) Report print (Full-color / Small) Report print (Gray-scale / Large) Report print (Gray-scale / Small) Report print (Monochrome / Large) Report print (Monochrome / Small) Report print (Full-color + Gray-scale / Large) Report print (Full-color + Gray-scale / Small) Report print (Full-color + Gray-scale 2) Report print (Full-color + Gray-scale 1)
Page 789 Chapter 16 　 Counter Description Support Send scan total 1 (Black-and-white) Send scan total 2 (Color) Send scan total 2 (Black-and-white) Send scan total 3 (Color) Send scan total 3 (Black-and-white) Send scan total 4 (Color) Send scan total 4 (Black-and-white) Send scan total 5 (Color) Send scan total 5 (Black-and-white) Send scan total 6 (Color)
Page 790 Chapter 16 Counter Description Support Send scan / SMB (Color) Send scan / SMB (Black-and-white) Send scan / IPX (Color) Send scan / IPX (Black-and-white) Send scan / Database (Color) Send scan / Database (Black-and-white) Send scan / Local print (Color) Send scan / Local print (Black-and-white) Send scan / Box (Color) Send scan / Box (Black-and-white)
Page 791 Chapter 16 　 COPIER > OPTION > CST Sub-item Description Level CST-U1/U2/ Specifying paper names for use in paper size groups U3/U4 If the following special paper sizes are set to U1, U2, U3, and U4, paper of the sizes can be handled on the universal cassette as special size paper. <Setting range>...
Page 792 Chapter 16 COPIER > OPTION > ACC Sub-item Description Level OUT-TRAY Setting whether or not to use the third paper ejection tray (mainly when the second and third paper ejection units are mounted) <Setting range> 0: Do not use [Default] 1: Use IN-TRAY Setting whether or not to use an inner paper ejection tray...
Page 793 Chapter 16 　 COPIER > OPTION > INT-FACE Sub-item Description Level AP-CODE Setting a CPCA path for a print job from the PrintMe application installed in the PS print server unit <Setting range> 0 to 99999999 [Default: 0] <COMBO> T-16-54 COPIER >OPTION >...
Page 794 Chapter 16 <LCNS-TR> Example of display: ST-XXXX 1 ( ) {0 to 0} [1] [2] [1] Status display 0: Not installed [Default] 1: Installed [2] Invalidation 0: Invalidate (Only 0 can be entered.) Transfer invalidation procedure 1. Select ST-XXXX, enter 0, and press the OK key. 2.
Page 795 Chapter 16 　 COPIER >OPTION >LCNS-TR Sub-item Description Level Acquiring a transfer license key for the PDF direct function in transfer invalidation PDFDR ST-SCR Displaying the encrypted secure print function installation status in transfer invalidation and executing transfer invalidation TR-SCR Acquiring a transfer license key for the encrypted secure print function in transfer invalidation Displaying the HDD encryption/complete erasure function installation status in...
Page 796: Feeder
Chapter 16 16.6.2 FEEDER 16.6.2.1 Feeder List 0007-9937 FEEDER>OPTION T-16-56 FEEDER > OPTION Sub-item Description Level SIZE-SW Setting whether or not to detect a mixed document of A/B size and inch size <Setting value> 0: Do not detect [Default] 1: Detect 16.6.3 SORTER 16.6.3.1 Sorter List 0007-9957...
Page 797: Board
Chapter 16 　 SORTER > OPTION Sub-item Description Level MD-SPRTN Setting the finisher function limit <Setting value> 0: Usual 1: Degenerated [Value at shipping/Value after RAM clearance: 0] 16.6.4 BOARD 16.6.4.1 Board List 0007-9959 BOARD > OPTION T-16-58 BOARD > OPTION Sub-item Description Level...
Page 798: Test （Test Print Mode
Chapter 16 16.7 TEST （Test Print Mode） 16.7.1 COPIER 16.7.1.1 Copier List 0008-0571 <PG> T-16-59 COPIER>TEST>PG Sub-item Description Level TYPE Enter a test print type number and press the Start key for test printing. (After test printing, be sure to return the number to 0.) 0: Image from CCD (Ordinary print) 1: Checker 2: 17 tones (Error diffusion method [T0BIC])
Page 799 Chapter 16 　 COPIER>TEST>PG Sub-item Description Level PG-PICK Selecting an output stage for test printing 1: Cassette 1 2: Cassette 2 3: Cassette 3 4: Cassette 4 5: Side deck 6: Manual feed 7 - 8: Not used 2-SIDE Setting the output mode for test printing 0: Simplex [Default] 1: Duplex PG-QTY Setting the number of pages for test printing...
Page 800 Chapter 16 - Once the network has been connected normally, OK is displayed. (End) - If NG is displayed, check the connection of the network cable first. If the network cable is connected normally, do Step 6 and later. If the network cable is not connected normally, repeat Step 5.
Page 801: Counter （Counter Mode
Chapter 16 　 16.8 COUNTER （Counter Mode） 16.8.1 COPIER 16.8.1.1 Copier List 0008-0599 <TOTAL> T-16-61 COPIER>COUNTER>TOTAL Sub-item Description Level SERVICE Total service counter 1 This counter is incremented when paper is ejected out of the printer. Irrespective of the paper size, large or small, the increment is one. After 99999999, the count returns to 00000000.
Page 802 Chapter 16 COPIER>COUNTER>TOTAL Sub-item Description Level RMT-PRT Remote print counter This counter is incremented with the charging counter when a print is ejected out of the machine or loaded again for printing the other side in remote printing. The increment is 0 for blank print and 1each for a large or small print. The count can be cleared.
Page 803 Chapter 16 　 T-16-62 COPIER>COUNTER>PICK-UP Sub-item Description Level C1/2/3/4 Cassette 1/2/3/4 paper feed total counter The number of sheets fed from Cassette 1/2/3/4 is displayed. Irrespective of the paper size, large or small, this counter is incremented one. After 99999999, the count returns to 00000000. Manual feed total counter The number of sheets fed from the manual paper feed unit is displayed.
Page 804 Chapter 16 T-16-64 COPIER>COUNTER>JAM Sub-item Description Level TOTAL Copier total jam counter FEEDER Feeder total jam counter SORTER Finisher total jam counter 2-SIDE Duplex unit jam counter Manual paper feed jam counter C1/2/3/4 Cassette 1/2/3/4 jam counter Side paper deck jam counter <MISC>...
Page 805 Chapter 16 　 COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1 Sub-item Description Level DVG-CYL Developing cylinder rotation counter Irrespective of the paper size, large or small, this counter is incremented one. C1/2/3/4- Cassette 1/2/3/4 feed roller counter PU-RL This counter is incremented two for the large size and one for the small size. C1/2/3/4- Cassette 1/2/3/4 separation roller counter SP-RL...
Page 806 Chapter 16 <DRBL-2> T-16-67 COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-2 Sub-item Description Level DF-PU-RL ADF paper feed roller counter Irrespective of the paper size, large or small, this counter is incremented one for each read document (not side) both in simplex mode and duplex mode. DF-SP-PL ADF separator counter The large and small sizes are not distinguished from each other.
Page 807 COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-2 Sub-item Description Level Buffer roller counter BFFRL The large and small sizes are not distinguished from each other.
Page 808 Chapter 17 　Service Tools...
Page 809 Contents Contents Chapter 17　Service Tools 17.1 Special Tools......................17-1 17.2 Oils and Solvents ....................17-3...
Page 810 Chapter 17 17.1 Special Tools 0007-6516 In addition to the standard tools set, you will need the following special tools for servicing of the machine: T-17-1 Tool name Tool No. Rank Shape Uses Digital multimeter FY9-2002 For making electrical checks. Cover switch TKN-0093 Tester extension pin...
Page 811 Chapter 17 　 Tool name Tool No. Rank Shape Uses NA-3 Test Chart FY9-9196 For checking and adjusting images. Key to Notation (rank) 　A: each service engineer is expected to carry one. 　B: each group of 5 service engineers is expected to carry one. 　C: each workshop is expected to carry one.
Page 812 Chapter 17 17.2 Oils and Solvents 0007-6517 T-17-2 Name Uses Composition Remarks Alcohol cleaning; e.g., fluoride-family - Do not bring near fire. glass, plastic, hydrocarbon - Procure locally. rubber; alcohol - IPA (isopropyl alcohol) may be external covers surface activating agent substituted.
Page 813 Appendix...
Page 814 General Timing Chart At Time of Printing 2 Prints, Continuous, Cassette 1 Print ready signal Print command received received PSTBY PINTR PRINT LSTR PSTBY Cassette 1 pickup motor (M6) Cassette 1 pickup solenoid (SL1) Main motor (M2) Primary charging Laser (LD) Developing AC bias (DEV_AC)
Page 815 At Time of Printing 2 Prints, Continuous, Cassette 1 Print ready signal Print command received received PSTBY PINTR PRINT LSTR PSTBY Cassette 1 pickup motor (M6) Cassette 1 pickup solenoid (SL1) Main motor (M2) Primary charging Laser (LD) Developing AC bias (DEV_AC) Developing DC bias (DEV_DC)
Page 816 Reader Unit Basic Sequence of Operation (in response to a press on the Start key; book mode; 1 original) Only if 1 sec or more has passed since previous rotation Shading correction start key STBY SCFW SCRW STBY Reader motor (M501) CIS HP sensor (PS503)
Page 817 General Circuit Diagram Signal Names List of Signals T-2-1 Notation Signal name Notation Signal name reader motor drive signal A C2_SIZECOMMON cassette 2 paper size detection signal common reader motor drive signal A* CNT0 laser driver control signal reader motor drive signal B CNT1 laser driver control signal reader motor drive single B*...
Page 818 T-2-2 Notation Signal name Notation Signal name EXIT2_KS_RX* No. 2 No. 3 delivery assembly transmission signal SIZE4 cassette size detection signal 4 EXIT2_KS_TX No. 2 No. 3 delivery assembly transmission signal SLV_CL_ON* developing clutch drive signal F_DOOR_S front cover open/closed detection signal SUB_TH sub thermistor detection signal F_FAN_LOCK...
Page 819 General Circuit Diagram (Printer) Fixing Assembly Fixing Unit AC Cable Fixing Ground-Fault Main Power Switch Power Supply Fixing Film Fixing Main Exit Fixing Sub Cable Breaker Speed Sensor Thermistor Thermistor Sensor PS13 Fixing Motor Fixing Unit AC Cable Fixing Unit AC Cable PLG1 ELCB1(100V) PCB8...
Page 820 General Circuit Diagram (Printer) Cassette 2 Cassette 2 Paper Paper Cassette 1 Cassette 1 Cassette 1 Cassette 1 Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 2 Cassette 2 Feed Cassette 1 Size Level A Level B Paper Pickup Cover Paper P/A Paper Level Paper Level Retry Paper P/A...
Page 821 General Circuit Diagram (Printer) Hopper Motor Sub Hopper Developing Toner Sensor Assembly Environment Toner Sensor Waste Sensor Toner Pre-Con. Front Sensor Cover Exposure Sensor PS16 PS22 Drum Thermistor Bottle Rotation Motor DC Controller PCB 3/4 CL22 PS15 Main Motor Duplexing Feeder Clutch Registration Clutch Registration Clutch Manual...
Page 822 General Circuit Diagram (Printer) DC Controller PCB 4/4 To Finisher-S1 To 2-Level Cassette Pedestal-Y2 To 3 Way Unit-A1 To Buffer Path Unit-E1 To Finisher-Q3/Saddle Finisher-Q4 (4/11) F14-5418-A504 F-2-4...
Page 823 General Circuit Diagram (Printer) Main Controller PCB 3/4 Reader Heater (Right) Reader Heater (Left) Reader Controller PCB 1/2 NE Controller- Reader Unit Card Reader-C1 Control Panel Unit Inverter PCB Keypad PCB LCD1 Control Panel Unit CPU PCB Control Panel Control Panel Unit (5/11) F14-5418-A505 F-2-5...
Page 824 General Circuit Diagram (Reader) (INCH/A)_ TYPE (A) _TYPE Document Sensor 2 Document Sensor 3 Document Sensor 1 Document Sensor 3 Document Sensor 4 PS506 PS504 PS506 PS507 PS505 Main Controller PCB 4/4 (AB) _TYPE (INCH/AB) _TYPE TO DADF-N1 Document Document Document Document Sensor 3...
Page 825 General Circuit Diagram (G3FAX) Speaker PCB26 G3 FAX Power Supply PCB to A501 J221 PCB22 G3 FAX Control PCB to A505 J1059 PCB23 to A505 J1005 Pseudo CI PCB PCB24 PCB28 NCU PCB Modular PCB Flat Cable to A501 J204 PCB27 Arrester PCB (7/11)
Page 826 General Circuit Diagram (G3FAX) Speaker PCB26 G3 FAX to A501 Power J221 Supply PCB PCB22 G3 FAX tO A505 Control J1059 PCB23 tO A505 J1005 Off-hook Power Supply PCB PCB24 PCB28 NCU PCB Modular PCB Flat Cable Flat to A501 J204 Cable PCB25...
Page 827 General Circuit Diagram (G3FAX) Speaker PCB26 G3 FAX to A501 Power J221 Supply PCB PCB22 G3 FAX Control to A505 J1059 PCB23 to A505 Off-hook J1030 Power Supply PCB PCB24 PCB28 NCU PCB Modular Flat Cable (9/11) FAX_G3_120V_1LINE F-2-9...
Page 828 General Circuit Diagram (G3FAX) Speaker PCB26 G3 FAX to A501 J221 Power Supply PCB to A505 J059 PCB22 G3 FAX Control PCB23 to A505 Off-hook J1005 Power Supply PCB PCB24 PCB28 NCU PCB Modular PCB Flat Cable Flat Cable PCB25 G3 Multi - port NCU PCB 2 Control PCB...
Page 829 General Circuit Diagram (G3FAX) Speaker PCB26 Off-hook to A501 Power J221 Supply PCB PCB22 G3 FAX Control to A505 J1059 PCB23 to A505 J1030 Off-hook Power Supply PCB PCB28 Modular PCB24 NCU PCB Flat Cable (11/11) FAX_G3_230V F-2-11...
Page 831 2270/2870/ 3570/4570 Cassette Feeding Unit-Y1/Y2 SERVICE MANUAL SEPT. 2004 REV. 0 COPYRIGHT 2004 CANON INC. CANON imageRUNNER Cassette Feeding Unit-Y1/Y2 REV. 0 PRINTED IN U.S.A.
Page 832 This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements or changes in products. When changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this manual, Canon will release technical information as the need arises. In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new edition of this manual.
Page 833 Introduction Symbols Used This documentation uses the following symbols to indicate special information: Symbol Description Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution, or Warning. Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks. Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire). Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.
Page 834 Introduction The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual: 1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with reference to the timing of operation. 　In the diagrams, represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name accompanies the symbol, the arrow indicates the direction of the electric signal.
Page 835 Contents Contents Chapter 1　Specifications 1.1 Product Specifications ....................1-1 1.1.1 Specifications ...................... 1-1 1.2 Names of Parts ......................1-2 1.2.1 Names of Parts ....................1-2 1.2.2 Section View ....................... 1-3 Chapter 2　Functions 2.1 Basic Construction..................... 2-1 2.1.1 Arrangement of Sensors/Solenoids..............2-1 2.2 Pick-Up/Feed Systm ....................
Page 836 Contents 3.3.2 B.Adjusting the Horizontal Registration (2nd side; only when installing an iR C3100 Series machine)..................... 3-9 Chapter 4　Parts Replacement Procedure 4.1 External Covers......................4-1 4.1.1 Rear Cover ......................4-1 4.1.2 Right Cover ......................4-1 4.1.3 Rear Right Cover ....................4-2 4.1.4 Front Right Cover ....................4-2 4.1.5 Lower Right Cover ....................4-3 4.2 Drive System......................
Page 837 Chapter 1　 Specification...
Page 838 Contents Contents 1.1 Product Specifications................1-1 1.1.1 Specifications ..................1-1 1.2 Names of Parts ...................1-2 1.2.1 Names of Parts ..................1-2 1.2.2 Section View ..................1-3...
Page 839: Product Specifications
Chapter 1 1.1 Product Specifications 1.1.1 Specifications 0001-6093 T-1-1 Item Description Remarks Paper accommodation front loading Pickup retard cassette 3/4 is of host machine Number of cassettes (large, small) Size switching by user plain paper, heavy paper, transparency (64 g/m2 to Paper type 163 g/m2), envelope Paper size...
Page 840: Names Of Parts
Chapter 1 　 1.2 Names of Parts 1.2.1 Names of Parts 0001-0973 External covers [1] Left Cover [2] Right front cover [3] Right lower cover [4] Right rear cover [5] Rear cover [6] Pedestal right cover F-1-1 F-1-2...
Page 841: Section View
Chapter 1 1.2.2 Section View 0003-3496 F-1-3 T-1-2 Name Pickup roller (cassette 4) Pickup roller (cassette 3) Vertical path roller 3 Feed roller (cassette 3) Feed roller (cassette 3) Vertical path roller 4 Feed roller (cassette 4) Separation roller (cassette 4)
Page 842: Chapter 2　Functions
Chapter 2　 Functions...
Page 843 Contents Contents 2.1 Basic Construction..................... 2-1 2.1.1 Arrangement of Sensors/Solenoids..............2-1 2.2 Pick-Up/Feed Systm ....................2-3 2.2.1 Overview......................2-3 2.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations................2-4 2.2.3 Identifying the Paper Size ................... 2-4 2.2.4 Paper Level Sensors .................... 2-7 2.3 Detecting Jams......................2-11 2.3.1 Delay Jam......................
Page 844: Basic Construction
Chapter 2 2.1 Basic Construction 2.1.1 Arrangement of Sensors/Solenoids 0001-5390 F-2-1 [1] Cassette 3 paper level sensor (B; PS6C) [2] Cassette 3 paper level sensor (A; PS5C) [3] Cassette 3 paper sensor (PS3C) [4] Cassette 3 retry paper sensor (PS1C) [5] Cassette 4 paper level sensor (B;...
Page 845 Chapter 2 　 F-2-2 [1] Cassette 3 pickup solenoid (SL1C) [2] Cassette 4 pickup solenoid (SL2C)
Page 846: Pick-Up/Feed Systm
Chapter 2 2.2 Pick-Up/Feed Systm 2.2.1 Overview 0001-9309 The paper inside the cassette is held up by the work of the lifer plate. When pickup takes place, the pickup roller moves down to come into contact with the stack of paper. The pickup roller starts to move down when the pickup solenoid goes on.
Page 847: Basic Sequence Of Operations
Chapter 2 　 2.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations 0001-9312 ・Basic Sequence of Operating (3 prints) Print Start PRINT Cassette 3 pickup motor (M1C) Cassette 3 pickup solenoid 0.8 Sec (SL1C) Cassette 3 retry sensor (PS1C) Cassette 2 retry sensor (PS11) Cassette 1 retry sensor (PS10) Main motor...
Page 848 Chapter 2 The cassette size dial is equipped with a switch operated to change between AB and Inch configurations; the cassette size detecting switch will detect the configuration as soon as a cassette is fitted in the machine. INCH SW4-ON=INCH F-2-5 [1] AB/Itch switch [2] Cassette size dial...
Page 849 Chapter 2 　 AB-configuration 305×457mm Envelope ON/OFF SW4 is used to detect the state of the AB/Inch-configuration switch. The machine will assume the absence of a cassette if it detects a combination not found in the table. At this time, it does not move up the cassette lifter. Since the paper size is not identified, there will be no indication of a paper size on the control panel;...
Page 850: Paper Level Sensors
Chapter 2 Inch-configuration 12×18 Envelope ON/OFF SW4 is used to detect the state of the AB/Inch-configuration switch. The machine will assume the absence of a cassette if it detects a combination not found in the table. At this time, it does not move up the cassette lifter. Since the paper size is not identified, there will be no indication of a paper size on the control panel;...
Page 851 Chapter 2 　 F-2-6 [1] Flag [2] Cassette paper sensor [3] Lifter clutch [4] Cassette paper level sensor A [5] Cassette paper level sensor B [6] Paper level sensor flag [7] Lifter gear [8] Tray...
Page 852 Chapter 2 Viewed From Front Full of paper Cassette paper Cassette paper level sensor B level sensor A Paper Half full of paper Paper Cassette paper Cassette paper level sensor B level sensor A OFF ON Little paper Paper Cassette paper Cassette paper level sensor B level sensor A...
Page 853 Chapter 2 　 T-2-4 Paper level Paper level Level of sensor Control panel Paper sensor sensor A sensor B (approx.) indication 100% to 50% of capacity 50% to 50 sheets 50 sheets or less no paper 2-10...
Page 854: Detecting Jams
Chapter 2 2.3 Detecting Jams 2.3.1 Delay Jam 0001-0925 The leading edge of paper does not reach the sensor within a specific period of time after the cassette 3/4 pickup motor switches to half-speed mode. Start key ON or Print start INTR PRINT Pickup motor...
Page 855: Common Stationary Jams
Chapter 2 　 2.3.2 Common Stationary Jams 0001-0926 The sensor in question does not go off within a specific period of time after it has gone ON. Start key ON or Print start INTR PRINT L + A L + A Jam check Sensor Normal...
Page 856: Door Open Jam
Chapter 2 2.3.4 Door Open Jam 0001-6947 The machine detects that the door has been opened while it is making copies/prints. T-2-8 Sensor Pedestal right cover open/closed sensor (PS9C) 2-13...
Page 857: Power Supply
Chapter 2 　 2.4 Power Supply 2.4.1 Power Supply Route 0001-6959 The power from the printer unit to the accessories is routed as follows: F-2-10 [1] Cassette pedestal I/F cable [2] 2-Case Pedestal-Y1 [3] Pickup heater cable 2-14...
Page 858 Chapter 2 When the power is turned on, the host machine supplies 24 VDC and 13 VDC to the pedestal controller PCB. The 24VDC power is used to drive the solenoid, while the 13VDC is converted to 5V power by the DC-DC converter on the pedestal controller PCB for use by sensors and ICs. Host machine Pedestal controller...
Page 859: Chapter 3　Installation
Chapter 3　 Installation...
Page 860 Contents Contents 3.1 Unpacking and Chacking the Components ..........3-1 3.1.1 Unpacking and Checking the Components .........3-1 3.2 Installation Procedure.................3-2 3.2.1 Turning Off the Host Machine............3-2 3.2.2 Installation Procedure................3-3 3.3 Making Adjustments ..................3-7 3.3.1 A. Adjusting the Horizontal Registration (1st side; mechanical) ..3-7 3.3.2 B.Adjusting the Horizontal Registration (2nd side;...
Page 861: Unpacking And Chacking The Components
Chapter 3 3.1 Unpacking and Chacking the Components 3.1.1 Unpacking and Checking the Components 0004-5101 Open the shipping box, and check to make sure that none of the following is missing: 11 17 11 17 11 17 11 17 LEGAL 305 457 LEGAL LEGAL...
Page 862: Installation Procedure
Chapter 3 　 3.2 Installation Procedure for iR2270/2870/3570/4570 3.2.1 Turning Off the Be sure to go through the following steps Host Machine 0007-2468 on the host machine before starting the work 1. Hold down the control panel power for iR C3100 Series switch for 3 sec or more.
Page 863: Installation Procedure
Chapter 3 place it on the machine. 3.2.2 Installation Procedure 0004-5111 1) Remove all tape from the machine. The host machine weighs about 100.0 kg. 2) Slide out both upper and lower cassettes, Be sure to work as a group of 4. and remove the tape;...
Page 864 Chapter 3 　 [1] found on the bottom of the machine 6) Close the machine's right cover [1]. so that both machines are securely joined. F-3-9 11) Out the Lattice connector cover Fit the F-3-7 lattice connector [1] of the machine into its host machine.
Page 865 Chapter 3 13) Turn the size detecting dial [2] so that the position index [1] is at the top. F-3-11 14) Attach the dial label [1] from the right F-3-12 side of the label position index by wrapping it to the size detecting dial [2] . Attach the Dial label [1] by butting it against the 2 locations indicated by arrows [3].
Page 866 Chapter 3 　 15) Attach the Size detection label [1]. 16) Set the dial [2] of the size detecting cam to the appropriate index, i.e., AB or Inch. F-3-13 17) Attach the cassette size label [1] to the cassette front cover. F-3-14 18) Connect the power cable to the power outlet.
Page 867: Making Adjustments
Chapter 3 3.3 Making Adjustments 3.3.1 A. Adjusting the Horizontal Registration (1st side; mechanical) 0004-5130 1) Make copies using cassette 3/4 as the source of paper; then, check to make sure that the leading edge margin is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm. 2.5±...
Page 868 Chapter 3 　 2) Remove the 1 screws [2], and detach the machine's right front cover [1]. F-3-16 3) Slide out the cassette 3/4. 4) Check the position of the index. F-3-17 5) Fit a screwdriver through the hole [2] of the right support to reach the horizontal registration assembly [1] of the cassette to adjust.
Page 869 Chapter 3 F-3-18 7) Move the horizontal registration adjusting plate [4] to the front and the rear to suit the index you checked in step 4). 8) Make copies using the cassette you have adjusted as the source of paper, and check to see that the blank (front side) of the image (front side) is 2.5 +/- 1.5 mm.
Page 870 Chapter 3 　 2.5±2.0 mm F-3-19 -If the horizontal registration for the cassette 3 or 4 is not as indicated, make the following adjust ments: 4) Start service mode, and enter the new adjustment value: -COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-C3RE -COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-C4RE If the adjustment value is in creased for 1, an image shifts to the paper feeding direction by 0.1 mm.
Page 871: Chapter 4　Parts Replacement Procedure
Chapter 4 　Parts Replacement Procedure...
Page 872 Contents Contents 4.1 External Covers......................4-1 4.1.1 Rear Cover ......................4-1 4.1.2 Right Cover ......................4-1 4.1.3 Rear Right Cover ....................4-2 4.1.4 Front Right Cover ....................4-2 4.1.5 Lower Right Cover ....................4-3 4.2 Drive System......................4-3 4.2.1 Cassette Pickup Motor 3 ..................4-4 4.2.2 Cassette Pickup Motor 4 ..................4-7 4.3 Document Feeding System ..................
Page 873: External Covers
Chapter 4 4.1 External Covers 4.1.2 Right Cover 4.1.2.1 Removing the 4.1.1 Rear Cover Pedestal Right Cover 0003-3120 1)Open the right cover [1], and free the 4.1.1.1 Removing the hook inside; then, detach the right cover. Pedestal Rear Cover 0003-3100 1)Remove the 3 screws [1] and the tapping screw [2];...
Page 874: Rear Right Cover
Chapter 4 　 4.1.3 Rear Right Cover 4.1.4 Front Right Cover 4.1.3.1 Removing the 4.1.4.1 Removing the Pedestal Rear Right Pedestal Front Right Cover Cover 0003-3103 0003-3104 1)Remove the screw, and detach the 1)Remove the screw, and detach the front pedestal rear right cover [1].
Page 875: Lower Right Cover
Chapter 4 4.2 Drive System 4.1.5 Lower Right Cover 4.1.5.1 Removing the 4.2.1 Cassette Pickup Motor 3 Pedestal Lower Right Cover 0003-3106 4.2.1.1 Removing the 1)Remove the 2 screws, and detach the Right Cover (lower lower right cover [1]. rear) 0003-4195 - If the Cassette Pedestal-Y1/Y2 is installed to an iR C3100 Series machine,...
Page 876 Chapter 4 　 2）Open the lower right cover [2]. 3） Remove the 5 screws [4], and detach the right cover (rear) [3]. F-4-8 4.2.1.3 Removing the Pedestal Rear Right F-4-7 Cover 0003-3228 Refer to procedure 4.1.3 4.2.1.2 Removing the Right Cover (lower 4.2.1.4 Removing the front)
Page 877 Chapter 4 4.2.1.7 Removing the 3)Remove the 2 screws [2], and detach the pickup motor 3 [1] from its base [2]. Cassette Pickup Motor 0003-3115 <Cassette Pedestal-Y1> 1)Disconnect the connector [1]. 2)Remove the 3 screws [2]; then, shift the pickup motor 3 [3] together with its base slightly to the right, and detach it to the front.
Page 878 Chapter 4 　 F-4-14 Points to Note When Installing the Motor Be sure that the timing belt[1] is sucurely fitted to the gear[2] of the motor and the gear [3] of the mounting base. F-4-12 3)Remove the 2 screws [2], and detach the pickup motor 3 [1] from its base [2].
Page 879: Cassette Pickup Motor 4
Chapter 4 slightly to the right, and detach it to the 4.2.2 Cassette Pickup Motor 4 front. 4.2.2.1 Removing the Pedestal Rear Right Cover 0003-3229 Refer to procedure 4.1.3 4.2.2.2 Removing the Pedestal Front Right Cover 0003-3248 Refer to procedure 4.1.4 4.2.2.3 Removing the Pedestal Lower Right...
Page 880 Chapter 4 　 You must not free the joint pins [2] from the motor by removing the 2 screws. F-4-17 F-4-19 <Cassette Pedestal-Y2> 1)Disconnect the connector [1]. You must not free the joint pins [2] 2)Remove the 3 screws [2]; then, shift the from the motor by removing the 2 pickup motor 3 [3] together with its base screws.
Page 881: Document Feeding System
Chapter 4 the harness from the guide. Document Feeding System 4.3.1 Pick-up Unit 3 4.3.1.1 Removing the Right Cover (lower rear) 0003-4183 Refer to procedure 4.2.1.1 F-4-21 4.3.1.2 Removing the Right Cover (lower 4)Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the front) 0003-4199 pickup unit 3 [2].
Page 882 Chapter 4 　 4.3.2 Pick-up Unit 4 4.3.2.1 Removing the Pedestal Rear Right Cover 0003-3218 Refer to procedure 4.1.3 4.3.2.2 Removing the Pedestal Front Right Cover 0003-3239 Refer to procedure 4.1.4 F-4-23 4.3.2.3 Removing the Pedestal Lower Right Cover 0003-3336 Refer to procedure 4.1.5 4.3.2.4 Removing the...
Page 883 Chapter 4 F-4-24 4)Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the F-4-26 pickup unit 4 [2]. F-4-25 Be sure that the harness of the pickup unit does not stick out the hook assembly [1] or the cable guide area [2]. 4-11...
Page 884: Pickup Rollor
Chapter 4 　 Feed/Separation Roller 4.3.3 Pickup Rollor The collar (roller core) of the machine's separation/feed roller available as a 4.3.3.1 Removing the service part is black. Pickup Roller/ At times, however, you may find that a Separation Roller 0003-3110 separation/feed roller with a gray collar (roller core) used in the machine;...
Page 885: Separation Rollor
Chapter 4 Feed/Separation Roller 4.3.4 Separation Rollor The collar (roller core) of the machine's separation/feed roller available as a 4.3.4.1 Removing the service part is black. Pickup Roller/ At times, however, you may find that a Separation Roller 0003-3112 separation/feed roller with a gray collar (roller core) used in the machine;...
Page 886: Feed Rollor
Chapter 4 　 Feed/Separation Roller 4.3.5 Feed Rollor The collar (roller core) of the machine's separation/feed roller available as a 4.3.5.1 Removing the service part is black. Pickup Roller/ At times, however, you may find that a Separation Roller 0003-3113 separation/feed roller with a gray collar (roller core) used in the machine;...
Page 887: Vertical Path Rollor
Chapter 4 4.3.6 Vertical Path Rollor 4.3.6.7 Removing the Pickup Unit 4 0003-3299 4.3.6.1 Removing the Refer to procedure 4.3.2 Right Cover (lower 4.3.6.8 Removing the rear) 0003-4184 Sensor Base 0003-3196 Refer to procedure 4.2.1.1 Refer to procedure 4.3.7 4.3.6.2 Removing the 4.3.6.9 Removing the...
Page 888: Sensor Mounting
Chapter 4 　 4.3.7 Sensor Mounting 2) Free the claw [A] of the bushing [1] at the front; then, shift it to the rear, and lift the vertical path roller [2] to detach. 4.3.7.1 Removing the Right Cover (lower rear) 0003-4185 Refer to procedure 4.2.1.1 4.3.7.2...
Page 889 Chapter 4 4.3.7.7 Removing the Pickup Unit 4 0003-3303 Refer to procedure 4.3.2 4.3.7.8 Removing the Sensor Base 0003-3194 1)Remove the 2 TP screws [1] and the binding screw [2] at the rear of the pickup assembly; then, detach the bracket [3].
Page 890 Chapter 4 　 2) Fit the 6 points [A] indicated in the figure in the holes of the base; then, mount the sensor base [2] using 4 screws [1]. F-4-36 F-4-35 3) Mount the gear [1] and the E-ring [2]. Try turning the gears to be sure that they turn without resistance.
Page 891: Electrical System
Chapter 4 4.4 Electrical System 4.4.1 Cassette Size Detection Unit 4.4.1.1 Removing the Pedestal Front Right Cover 0003-3250 Refer to procedure 4.1.4 4.4.1.2 Removing the Pedestal Lower Right F-4-37 Cover 0003-3268 Refer to procedure 4.1.5 4.4.1.4 Removing the Cassette Size 4.4.1.3 Removing the Detection Unit...
Page 892: Pedestal Controller Pcb
Chapter 4 　 4.4.2 Pedestal Controller PCB 3)For the upper, remove the 5 clamps [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach the cassette size detecting unit 4.4.2.1 Removing the [3]. Pedestal Rear Cover 0003-3102 Refer to procedure 4.1.1 4.4.2.2 Removing the Pedestal Controller...
Page 893: Cassette Retry Paper Sensor
Chapter 4 right cover (rear) [3]. 4.4.3 Cassette Retry Paper Sensor 4.4.3.1 Removing the Right Cover (lower rear) 0003-4187 - If the Cassette Pedestal-Y1/Y2 is installed to an iR C3100 Series machine, 1）Open the right door [1] of the pedestal. 2）Open the lower right cover [2].
Page 894 Chapter 4 　 4.4.3.6 Removing the Pedestal Lower Right Cover 0003-3258 Refer to procedure 4.1.5 4.4.3.7 Removing the Pickup Unit 4 0003-3306 Refer to procedure 4.3.2 4.4.3.8 Removing the Sensor Base 0003-3197 Refer to procedure 4.3.7 F-4-44 4.4.3.9 Removing the Cassette Retry Paper 4.4.3.3 Removing the...
Page 895: Cassette Paper Sensor
Chapter 4 4.4.4 Cassette Paper Sensor 4.4.4.7 Removing the Pickup Unit 4 0003-3314 4.4.4.1 Removing the Refer to procedure 4.3.2 Right Cover (lower 4.4.4.8 Removing the rear) 0003-4189 Cassette Paper Sensor 0003-3206 Refer to procedure 4.2.1.1 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the cassette paper sensor [2].
Page 896: Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/B)
Chapter 4 　 4.4.5 Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/B) 4.4.5.1 Removing the Right Cover (lower rear) 0003-4194 Refer to procedure 4.2.1.1 4.4.5.2 Removing the Right Cover (lower F-4-47 front) 0003-4252 4)Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the Refer to procedure 4.2.1.2 pickup unit 3 [2].
Page 897 Chapter 4 F-4-50 4)Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the F-4-49 pickup unit 4 [2]. 4.4.5.6 Removing the Pedestal Lower Right Cover 0003-3260 Refer to procedure 4.1.5 4.4.5.7 Removing the Pickup Unit 4 0003-3316 1)Detach the cassette 3/4. 2)Remove the screw [1],a and detach the F-4-51 sensor base [2].
Page 898 Chapter 4 　 1) Disconnect the connector [1] (1 pc. Be sure that the harness of the pickup each), and detach the cassette power unit does not stick out the hook level sensor (A/B) [2]. assembly [1] or the cable guide area [2]. F-4-53 F-4-52 4.4.5.8...
Page 899: Cassette Pickup Solenoid
Chapter 4 4.4.6 Cassette Pickup Solenoid 4.4.6.4 Removing the Pedestal Front Right Cover 0003-3249 4.4.6.1 Removing the Right Cover (lower Refer to procedure 4.1.4 rear) 0003-4197 4.4.6.5 Removing the Refer to procedure 4.2.1.1 Pickup Unit 3 0003-3290 4.4.6.2 Removing the Refer to procedure 4.3.1 Right Cover (lower 4.4.6.6...
Page 900: Right Door Open/Closed Sensor
Chapter 4 　 4.4.7 Right Door Open/Closed 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw [2]; then, detach the Sensor cassette pickup solenoid [3]. 4.4.7.1 Removing the Pedestal Rear Right Cover 0003-3231 Refer to procedure 4.1.3 4.4.7.2 Removing the Right Door Open/...
Page 901 Chapter 4 2)Remove the screw [1], and detach the sensor base [2]. F-4-57 3)Detach the sensor [2] from the sensor base [1], F-4-58 4-29...
Page 902: Chapter 5　Maintenance
　 Chapter 5 Maintenance...
Page 903 Contents Contents 5.1 Maintenance and Inspection...............5-1 5.1.1 Periodically Replaced Parts..............5-1 5.1.1.1 Periodically Replaced Parts............5-1 5.1.2 Durables ....................5-1 5.1.2.1 Durables ..................5-1 5.2 Outline of Electrical Components..............5-2 5.2.1 Arrangement and Functions of Electrical Components ......5-2...
Page 904: Maintenance And Inspection
Chapter 5 5.1 Maintenance and Inspection 5.1.1 Periodically Replaced Parts 5.1.1.1 Periodically Replaced Parts 0001-8508 This machine does not have parts that require periodical replacement. 5.1.2 Durables 5.1.2.1 Durables 0001-8561 T-5-1 as of May 2003 Ref. Parts name Parts No. Q'ty Life (prints;...
Page 905: Outline Of Electrical Components
Chapter 5 　 5.2 Outline of Electrical Components 5.2.1 Arrangement Functions Electrical Components 0005-4318 T-5-2 FUNC pedest Parts TION> Ref. Name Description number PART- contro ller MTR>1 cassette 3 pickup motor FM2-1495 drives pickup unit 3 J725 MTR>1 cassette 4 pickup motor FM2-1495 drives pickup unit 4 J732...
Page 906 Chapter 5 FUNC pedest Parts TION> Ref. Name Description number PART- contro ller controls timing of pickup from SL51 cassette 3 pickup sensor FH6-5055 SL>11 J726 cassette 3 controls timing of pickup from SL52 cassette 4 pickup solenoid FH6-5055 SL>12 J727 cassette 4 FG3-2798...
Page 907 Chapter 5 　 PS53 PS54 SL51 PS51 PS52 PS55 PS56 PS58 PS57 SL52 SW53 PS59 SW51 SW52 F-5-1...
Page 909 2270/2870/ 3570/4570 Inner 2-Way Tray-D1 SERVICE MANUAL SEPT. 2004 REV. 0 COPYRIGHT 2004 CANON INC. CANON imageRUNNER Inner 2-Way Tray-D1 REV. 0 PRINTED IN U.S.A.
Page 910 This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements or changes in products. When changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this manual, Canon will release technical information as the need arises. In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new edition of this manual.
Page 911 Introduction Symbols Used This documentation uses the following symbols to indicate special information: Symbol Description Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution, or Warning. Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks. Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire). Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.
Page 912 Introduction The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual: 1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with reference to the timing of operation. 　In the diagrams, represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name accompanies the symbol, the arrow indicates the direction of the electric signal.
Page 913 Contents Contents Chapter 1　Installation 1.1 Unpacking and Chacking the Components..............1-1 1.1.1 Unpacking and Checking the Components............1-1 1.2 Preparation Before Installation .................. 1-2 1.2.1 Preparation Before Installation ................1-2 1.3 Installation Procedure ....................1-3 1.3.1 Turning Off the Host Machine................1-3 1.3.2 Installation Procedure ..................
Page 914 　 Chapter 1 Installation...
Page 915 Contents Contents 1.1 Unpacking and Chacking the Components ..........1-1 1.1.1 Unpacking and Checking the Components .........1-1 1.2 Preparation Before Installation ..............1-2 1.2.1 Preparation Before Installation ............1-2 1.3 Installation Procedure.................1-3 1.3.1 Turning Off the Host Machine............1-3 1.3.2 Installation Procedure................1-3...
Page 916 Chapter 1 1.1 Unpacking and Chacking the Components 1.1.1 Unpacking and Checking the Components 0006-9409 Unpack the shipping box, and check to make sure that none of the contents is missing. F-1-1 T-1-1 Inside paper tray 1 pc.
Page 917 Chapter 1 　 1.2 Preparation Before Installation 1.2.1 Preparation Before Installation 0007-4159 Make sure that the 3 Way Unit is installed before installing this tray.
Page 918 Chapter 1 1.3 Installation Procedure 1.3.1 Turning Off the Host Machine 0007-4807 Before starting the work, be sure to go through the following in strict sequence: 1. Hold down the control panel power switch for 3 sec or more. 2. Go through the shutdown sequence indicated on the screen so that the main power switch will be ready to be turned off.
Page 919 Chapter 1 　 6) Hold down the control panel power switch for 3 sec or more. 7) Go through the instructions indicated on the control panel screen so that the main power switch will be ready to be tuned off. 8) Turn off the main power switch.
Page 921 2270/2870/ 3570/4570 3-Way Unit-A1 SERVICE MANUAL SEPT. 2004 REV. 0 COPYRIGHT 2004 CANON INC. CANON imageRUNNER 3-Way Unit-A1 REV. 0 PRINTED IN U.S.A.
Page 922 This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements or changes in products. When changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this manual, Canon will release technical information as the need arises. In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new edition of this manual.
Page 923 Introduction Symbols Used This documentation uses the following symbols to indicate special information: Symbol Description Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution, or Warning. Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks. Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire). Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.
Page 924 Introduction The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual: 1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with reference to the timing of operation. 　In the diagrams, represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name accompanies the symbol, the arrow indicates the direction of the electric signal.
Page 925 Contents Contents Chapter 1　Specifications 1.1 Product Specifications ....................1-1 1.1.1 Specifications ...................... 1-1 1.2 Names of Parts ......................1-4 1.2.1 External View ..................... 1-4 1.2.2 Cross Section....................... 1-5 Chapter 2　Functions 2.1 Basic Construction..................... 2-1 2.1.1 Basic Construction ....................2-1 2.2 Basic Operation......................2-3 2.2.1 Delivery to the No.
Page 926 Contents Chapter 4　Parts Replacement Procedure 4.1 Removing from the Host Machine................4-1 4.1.1 3 Way Unit ......................4-1 4.2 Drive System......................4-5 4.2.1 Delivery Motor 2 ....................4-5 4.2.2 Delivery Motor 3 ....................4-6 4.3 Document Feeding System ..................4-7 4.3.1 Delivery Roller 2 ....................4-7 4.3.2 Reversing Roller ....................4-9 4.3.3 Delivery Roller 3 ....................4-10 4.3.4 Duplexing Inlet Roller ..................4-12...
Page 927 　 Chapter 1 Specifications...
Page 928 Contents Contents 1.1 Product Specifications................1-1 1.1.1 Specifications ..................1-1 1.2 Names of Parts ...................1-4 1.2.1 External View..................1-4 1.2.2 Cross Section..................1-5...
Page 929 Chapter 1 1.1 Product Specifications 1.1.1 Specifications T-1-1 Item Specifications Number of bins No. 1 delivery slot: inside tray of host machine No. 2 delivery slot: 1 bin (optional) No. 3 delivery slot: outside machine (optional) Stacking method Face-down Paper No.
Page 930 Chapter 1 　 - Number of Sheets in a Stack 　1) A4, B5, A5R T-1-2 No. 1 delivery No. 2 delivery No. 3 delivery slot slot slot Plain paper 64g/m2 250 sheets 100 sheets 150 sheets 75g/m2 250 sheets 100 sheets 150 sheets 80g/m2 250 sheets...
Page 931 Chapter 1 No. 1 delivery No. 2 delivery No. 3 delivery slot slot slot envelope Tracing paper 25 sheets 10 sheets Postcard...
Page 932 Chapter 1 　 1.2 Names of Parts 1.2.1 External View 0007-6248 No. 3 delivery slot No. 2 delivery slot No. 1 delivery slot F-1-1 [1] No. 2 delivery motor [2] No. 3 delivery motor [3] Extension delivery kit controller PCB [4] No.
Page 933 Chapter 1 1.2.2 Cross Section 0007-6130 [2] [3] [5] [6] No.3 No.2 delivery slot delivery slot No.1 delivery slot [17] [16] [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] F-1-2 [1]　Reversing guide [2]　Reversing roller [3]　Reversal sensor [4]　Duplexing flapper [5]　No. 3 delivery flapper [6]　No.
Page 934 　 Chapter 2 Functions...
Page 935 Contents Contents 2.1 Basic Construction..................... 2-1 2.1.1 Basic Construction ....................2-1 2.2 Basic Operation......................2-3 2.2.1 Delivery to the No. 1 Delivery Slot ..............2-3 2.2.2 Delivery to the No. 2 Delivery Slot ..............2-4 2.2.3 Delivery to the No. 3 Delivery Slot ..............2-5 2.2.4 Movement of Paper in Duplex Mode..............
Page 936 Chapter 2 2.1 Basic Construction 2.1.1 Basic Construction 0007-6133 The following shows the major components of the extension delivery kit: [10] F-2-1 [1] No. 2 delivery motor [2] No. 3 delivery motor [3] Duplex inlet sensor [4] No. 3 delivery sensor [5] Extension delivery kit controller PCB [6] No.
Page 937 Chapter 2 　 The following is a diagram showing the drive system of the extension delivery kit: PS4A Reversal guide No. 3 delivery slot No. 2 delivery slot PS2A PS1A PS5A No. 1 delivery slot PS3A F-2-2 T-2-1 Notation Name No.
Page 938 Chapter 2 2.2 Basic Operation 2.2.1 Delivery to the No. 1 Delivery Slot 0007-6136 The following shows the sequence of operation used to discharge paper to the No. 1 delivery slot: 1) Paper arrives from the delivery slot of the host machine. A specific period of time after the leading edge of the paper reaches the fixing outlet sensor (PS13), the No.
Page 939 Chapter 2 　 2.2.2 Delivery to the No. 2 Delivery Slot 0007-6137 The following shows the sequence of operation used to discharge paper to the No. 2 delivery slot. 1) Paper arrives from the delivery slot of the host machine. A specific period of time after the leading edge of the paper reaches the fixing outlet sensor (PS13), the No.
Page 940 Chapter 2 2.2.3 Delivery to the No. 3 Delivery Slot 0007-6138 The following shows the sequence of operation used to discharge paper to the No. 3 delivery slot: 1) Paper arrives from the delivery slot of the host machine. A specific period of time after the leading edge of the paper reaches the fixing outlet sensor (PS13), the No.
Page 941 Chapter 2 　 2) When the paper moves past the reversal sensor (PS4A) and its trailing edge reaches a specific point in front of the reversing roller, the No. 3 delivery motor (M2) stops once and then starts again to rotate in reverse direction after a specific period of time. At the same time, the No.
Page 942 Chapter 2 2.2.4 Movement of Paper in Duplex Mode 0007-6139 The following shows the sequence of operation used to move paper in duplex mode (copy or print): 1) Paper arrives from the delivery slot of the host machine. A specific period of time after the leading edge of paper reaches the fixing outlet sensor (PS13), the No.
Page 943 Chapter 2 　 2) When the paper has moved past the reversal sensor (PS4A) and its trailing edge reaches a specific point in front of the reversing roller, the No. 3 delivery motor (M2) stops once and starts again to rotate in reverse direction after a specific period of time. The paper is moved as it is to the duplex inlet assembly.
Page 944 Chapter 2 2.3 Detecting Jams 2.3.1 Arrangement of Sensors 0007-6140 The following shows the sensors used to check for jams in the extension delivery kit: PS4A PS5A PS1A PS14 PS3A F-2-12 2.3.2 Delay Jam 0007-6141 The machine will identify a delay jam if any of the foregoing sensors does not go on within a specific period of time.
Page 945 Chapter 2 　 2.3.3 Stationary Jam 0007-6142 The machine will identify a stationary jam if any of the following sensors does not go off within a specific period of time after it has gone on. The following sensors are used to check for jams: T-2-3 Notation Name...
Page 946 　 Chapter 3 Installation...
Page 947 Contents Contents 3.1 Unpacking and Chacking the Components..............3-1 3.1.1 Unpacking and Checking the Components............3-1 3.2 Installation Procedure ....................3-2 3.2.1 Turning Off the Host Machine................3-2 3.2.2 Removing the Covers and the Right Door ............3-3 3.2.3 Installing the 3 Way Unit-A1................3-6 3.2.4 Mounting the Covers and the Right Door............
Page 948 Chapter 3 3.1 Unpacking and Chacking the Components 3.1.1 Unpacking and Checking the Components 0007-2072 If you are planning to install a side paper deck at the same time, it is recommended that you install the 3 Way Unit-A1 first. Open the shipping box, and check to make sure that none of the contents is missing.
Page 949 Chapter 3 　 3.2 Installation Procedure 3.2.1 Turning Off the Host Machine 0007-2127 Before starting the work, be sure to go through the following in strict sequence: 1. Hold down the control panel power switch for 3 sec or more. 2.
Page 950 Chapter 3 3.2.2 Removing the Covers and the Right Door 0007-2161 1) Open the pedestal right door [1]. (if equipped with a 2-Cassette Pedestal-Y2) 2) Open the lower right door [2]. 3) Remove the 5 screws [3], and detach the right cover (rear) [4].
Page 951 Chapter 3 　 14) Detach the delivery tray right cover [1]. F-3-6 F-3-9 12) Peel off the face plate [1]. 15) Mount the support cover. Do not tighten the screw yet. Wait until step 13), when you will be mounting the covers and the right door. 16) Mount the delivery tray using a screw.
Page 952 Chapter 3 - Take care so that the surface of the detach. photosensitive drum will not be exposed to light for a long time. F-3-12 F-3-10 When detaching the right door, be sure to take care not to touch the primary transfer 21) Remove the 2 self-taping screws [1], roller [1].
Page 953 Chapter 3 　 3.2.3 Installing the 3 Way Unit-A1 0007-2384 1) Take out the 3 way unit from its plastic bag. Be sure hold the unit as shown in the figure. F-3-15 2) Remove all packing tape from the 3 way unit.
Page 954 Chapter 3 temporarily tightened in step 5). 9) Close the 3 way unit [1]. F-3-17 5) Temporarily tighten the 2 included screws [1]. F-3-19 6) Remove the screw [2], and detach the plate [3]. 10) Connect the connector [1] to the host 　The removed screw will no longer be machine.
Page 955 Chapter 3 　 3.2.4 Mounting the Covers and the Right Door 0007-2393 1) Match the pin [2] and the hole at the bottom of the right door. F-3-22 F-3-21 5) Open the 3 way unit [1]. 6) Slightly lift the 3 way unit [1] so that it 2) Match the mounting plate [1] found at is matched against the right door [2].
Page 956 Chapter 3 When matching the position, take care so that the 3-way unit will not open 80 deg or more. 7) Put the pin [1] into the hole [2] until it stops, thus joining the right door [4] and the 3 way unit [3]. F-3-26 9) Using the screw [1] you removed in step 8), mount the joint plate [2].
Page 957 Chapter 3 　 Take care not to trap the harness [1] by the cut-off [2] of the right cover (rear). F-3-30 F-3-28 16) Using 2 screws [2], mount the front cover unit [3]; then, fit the face rubber 11) Close the right door. member [1].
Page 958 Chapter 3 17) Close the upper front cover [1]. F-3-32 3-11...
Page 959 Chapter 3 　 3.3 Checking the Operation 3.3.1 Checking the Operation 0007-2399 1) Connect the power cable to the power outlet. 2) Turn on the main power switch. 3) Set up the special tray to suit the needs of the user. Thereafter, check the operation. When setting up the No.
Page 960: Chapter 4　Parts Replacement Procedure
　 Chapter 4 Parts Replacement Procedure...
Page 961 Contents Contents 4.1 Removing from the Host Machine................4-1 4.1.1 3 Way Unit ......................4-1 4.2 Drive System......................4-5 4.2.1 Delivery Motor 2 ....................4-5 4.2.2 Delivery Motor 3 ....................4-6 4.3 Document Feeding System ..................4-7 4.3.1 Delivery Roller 2 ....................4-7 4.3.2 Reversing Roller ....................4-9 4.3.3 Delivery Roller 3 ....................4-10 4.3.4 Duplexing Inlet Roller ..................4-12 4.3.5 Inlet Roller ......................4-13...
Page 962: Removing From The Host Machine
Chapter 4 4.1 Removing from the Host Machine 4.1.1 3 Way Unit 4.1.1.1 Removing the Inside Delivery Tray, Reversal Guide, and Inside Upper Cover 0007-6317 1) Remove the inside delivery tray [1]. 2) Remove the reversing guide [2]. 3) Remove the screw [3], and detach the inside upper cover [4].
Page 963 Chapter 4 　 2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing plate [2]. F-4-6 5) While freeing the hinge assembly [2], detach the right door. F-4-4 3) Remove the joint shaft [1], and free the extension delivery unit [2] from the right door.
Page 964 Chapter 4 F-4-9 3) Open the extension delivery kit [1]. 4) Remove the 2 screws [3]. 5) Remove the 2 screws [2], and close the extension delivery kit. F-4-8 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place, be sure to close the right door first.
Page 965 Chapter 4 　 6) Detach the extension delivery kit [1] from the host machine. F-4-11...
Page 966: Drive System
Chapter 4 4.2 Drive System 4.2.1 Delivery Motor 2 4.2.1.1 Removing the Inside Delivery Tray, Reversal Guide, and Inside Upper Cover 0007-6151 Refer to procedure 4.1.1.1 4.2.1.2 Removing the F-4-12 Right Cover (rear) 0007-6170 Refer to procedure 4.1.1.2 4.2.1.3 Removing the Right Door 0007-9322 Refer to procedure 4.1.1.3...
Page 967 Chapter 4 　 4.2.2 Delivery Motor 3 4.2.2.5 Removing the No. 3 Delivery Motor 0007-6160 4.2.2.1 Removing the 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 2 screws [2]; then, detach the Inside Delivery Tray, No. 3 delivery motor [3]. Reversal Guide, and Inside Upper Cover 0007-6158...
Page 968 Chapter 4 Document Feeding 4.3.1.5 Removing the No. 2 Delivery Roller System 0007-6164 1) Open the extension delivery kit. 4.3.1 Delivery Roller 2 4.3.1.1 Removing the Inside Delivery Tray, Reversal Guide, and Inside Upper Cover 0007-6161 Refer to procedure 4.1.1.1 F-4-14 4.3.1.2 Removing the...
Page 969 Chapter 4 　 3) Remove the E-ring [1]. F-4-18 F-4-16 4) Remove the E-ring [1], and pull out the joint pin [2]; then, detach the No. 2 delivery unit [3]. F-4-19 F-4-17 5) Remove the 3 E-rings [1], gear [2], and F-4-20 2 bushings [3];...
Page 970: Reversing Roller
Chapter 4 4.3.2 Reversing Roller 4.3.2.5 Removing the Reversing Roller 0007-6177 4.3.2.1 Removing the 1) Remove the E-ring [1], and detach the bushing [2]. Inside Delivery Tray, Reversal Guide, and Inside Upper Cover 0007-6167 Refer to procedure 4.1.1.1 4.3.2.2 Removing the Right Cover (rear) 0007-6173 Refer to procedure 4.1.1.2...
Page 971 Chapter 4 　 4.3.3 Delivery Roller 3 4.3.3.5 Removing the No. 3 Delivery Roller 0007-6184 4.3.3.1 Removing the 1) Open the extension delivery kit. Inside Delivery Tray, Reversal Guide, and Inside Upper Cover 0007-6179 Refer to procedure 4.1.1.1 4.3.3.2 Removing the Right Cover (rear) 0007-6200 Refer to procedure 4.1.1.2...
Page 972 Chapter 4 3) Free the cable from the 8 wire saddles [1], and detach the re-use band [2]. F-4-25 F-4-26 5) Remove the 2 E-rings [1], 2 gears [2], belt [3], pin [4], and 5 screws [5]; then, When pulling out the joint pin, hold the detach the plate [6].
Page 973: Duplexing Inlet Roller
Chapter 4 　 F-4-29 4.3.4 Duplexing Inlet Roller F-4-27 4.3.4.1 Removing the Inside Delivery Tray, 6) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the Reversal Guide, and No. 3 delivery frame [2]. Inside Upper Cover 0007-6185 Refer to procedure 4.1.1.1 4.3.4.2 Removing the Right Cover (rear)
Page 974: Inlet Roller
Chapter 4 4.3.5 Inlet Roller 4.3.4.5 Removing the Duplex Inlet Roller 0007-6188 4.3.5.1 Removing the 1) Open the extension delivery kit. Inside Delivery Tray, Reversal Guide, and Inside Upper Cover 0007-6189 Refer to procedure 4.1.1.1 4.3.5.2 Removing the Right Cover (rear) 0007-6201 Refer to procedure 4.1.1.2 F-4-30...
Page 975 Chapter 4 　 F-4-32 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the F-4-34 cover [2]. 4) Remove the No. 1 delivery flapper [1] and the spring [2]. F-4-33 3) Remove the solenoid lever [1]. F-4-35 4-14...
Page 976 Chapter 4 5) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the cover [2]. F-4-38 F-4-36 6) Remove the 2 E-rings [1] and the 2 bushings [2]; then, detach the inlet roller [3]. F-4-37 4-15...
Page 977: Electrical System
Chapter 4 　 4.4 Electrical System 4.4.1.5 Removing the No. 2 Delivery Sensor 0007-6208 1) Open the extension delivery kit. 4.4.1 Delivery Sensor 2 4.4.1.1 Removing the Inside Delivery Tray, Reversal Guide, and Inside Upper Cover 0007-6197 Refer to procedure 4.1.1.1 4.4.1.2 Removing the Right Cover (rear)
Page 978 Chapter 4 5) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the 3) Remove the solenoid lever [1]. cover [2]. F-4-41 F-4-43 4) Remove the No. 1 delivery flapper [1] 6) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the and the spring [2]. cover [2].
Page 979: Delivery Tray 2 Paper Level Sensor
Chapter 4 　 4.4.2 Delivery Tray 2 Paper 7) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the No. 2 delivery sensor [2]. Level Sensor 4.4.2.1 Removing the Inside Delivery Tray, Reversal Guide, and Inside Upper Cover 0007-6209 Refer to procedure 4.1.1.1 4.4.2.2 Removing the Right Cover (rear)
Page 980: Reversal Sensor
Chapter 4 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and 4.4.3 Reversal Sensor detach the No. 2 delivery tray full sensor [2]. 4.4.3.1 Removing the Inside Delivery Tray, Reversal Guide, and Inside Upper Cover 0007-6217 Refer to procedure 4.1.1.1 4.4.3.2 Removing the Right Cover (rear) 0007-6218 Refer to procedure 4.1.1.2...
Page 981: Duplexing Inlet Sensor
Chapter 4 　 4.4.4 Duplexing Inlet Sensor 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the reversal sensor [2]. 4.4.4.1 Removing the Inside Delivery Tray, Reversal Guide, and Inside Upper Cover 0007-6221 Refer to procedure 4.1.1.1 4.4.4.2 Removing the Right Cover (rear) 0007-6223 Refer to procedure 4.1.1.2 4.4.4.3...
Page 982 Chapter 4 4.4.5 Delivery Sensor 3 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the duplex inlet sensor [2]. 4.4.5.1 Removing the Inside Delivery Tray, Reversal Guide, and Inside Upper Cover 0007-6227 Refer to procedure 4.1.1.1 4.4.5.2 Removing the Right Cover (rear) 0007-6229 Refer to procedure 4.1.1.2 4.4.5.3...
Page 983 Chapter 4 　 1) Disconnect the connector [1], and 2) Remove the solenoid lever [1], and detach the No. 3 delivery sensor [2]. remove the 2 screws [2]. F-4-49 F-4-51 4.4.6 Delivery Solenoid 1 3) Pull out the solenoid [1], and disconnect 4.4.6.1 Removing the the connector [2];...
Page 984 Chapter 4 4.4.7 Delivery Solenoid 2 4.4.7.1 Removing the Delivery Solenoid 0007-6234 1) Open the right door, and remove the joint pin [1]. 2) Loosen the screw [2], and detach the cover [3]. Remove the 2 screws [4], and detach the cover [5]. F-4-54 4.4.8 Delivery Solenoid 3 4.4.8.1...
Page 985: Way Unit Controller Pcb
Chapter 4 　 1) Open the right door, and remove the 4.4.9 3 Way Unit Controller joint pin [1]. 2) Loosen the screw [2], and detach the cover [3]. Remove the 2 screws [4], and detach the cover [5]. 4.4.9.1 Removing the Inside Delivery Tray, Reversal Guide, and...
Page 986 Chapter 4 1) Disconnect the 5 connectors [1], and remove the 2 screws [2]; then, detach the extension delivery kit controller PCB [3]. F-4-57 4-25...
Page 987: Chapter 5　Maintenance
　 Chapter 5 Maintenance...
Page 988 Contents Contents 5.1 Maintenance and Inspection...............5-1 5.1.1 Periodically Replaced Parts..............5-1 5.1.1.1 Periodically Replaced Parts............5-1 5.1.2 Durables ....................5-1 5.1.2.1 Durables ..................5-1 5.1.3 Periodical Servicing ................5-1 5.1.3.1 Scheduled Servicing..............5-1 5.2 Outline of Electrical Components..............5-2 5.2.1 Electrical Components ................5-2...
Page 989: Maintenance And Inspection
Chapter 5 5.1 Maintenance and Inspection 5.1.1 Periodically Replaced Parts 5.1.1.1 Periodically Replaced Parts The 3-Way Unit-A1 does not have parts that require periodical replacement. 5.1.2 Durables 5.1.2.1 Durables The 3-Way Unit-A1 does not have parts that are designated as durables. 5.1.3 Periodical Servicing 5.1.3.1 Scheduled Servicing The 3-Way Unit-A1 does not have parts that require scheduled servicing.
Page 990 Chapter 5 　 5.2 Outline of Electrical Components 5.2.1 Electrical Components T-5-1 Extension Nota Name Description Parts No. controller Jam code tion detects paper in the No. 2 No. 2 delay sensor FH7-7312 J744 xx09 delivery path No. 2 delivery tray full detects the state (full) of the FH7-7312 J743...
Page 991 Chapter 5 T-5-2 Extensio PART- atio Name Description Parts No. delivery controll er PCB MTR>1 No. 2 delivery motor drives the No. 2 delivery roller FH5-1108 J743 drives the reversing roller, duplex MTR>1 No. 3 motor FH5-1021 J743 inlet roller, and No. 3 delivery roller discharges paper to the No.
Page 992 Appendix...
Page 993 General Circuit Diagram NO.2 DELIVERY SOLENOID NO.2 DELIVERY NO.1 DELIVERY SOLENOID FULL SENSOR MOTOR NO.3 DELIVERY MOTOR REVERSAL SENSOR NO.2 DELIVERY SENSOR INNER 2-WAY TRAY CONTROLLER PCB DUPLEX INLET SENSOR NO.3 DELIVERY SENSOR NO.3 DELIVERY SOLENOID NO.2 DELIVERY SOLENOID F-1-1...

This manual is also suitable for:

Imagerunner 2870 Imagerunner 3570 Imagerunner 4570

Canon imageRUNNER 2270 Service Manual

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Introduction

System Construction/Product Specifications

Chapter 2 Installation

Chapter 2 Installation

Chapter 3 Basic Operation

Construction/Basic Sequence

Chapter 4 Main Controller

Table of Contents

Chapter 5 Original Exposure System

Table of Contents

Chapter 6 Laser Exposure

Table of Contents

Chapter 7 Image Formation

Table of Contents

Chapter 8 Pickup/Feeding System

Table of Contents

Chapter 9 Fixing System

Table of Contents

Chapter 10 External And Controls

Table of Contents

Chapter 11 MEAP

Chapter 12 Maintenance And Inspection

Quick Links

Chapters

Troubleshooting

Related Manuals for Canon imageRUNNER 2270

Summary of Contents for Canon imageRUNNER 2270